SlideShare a Scribd company logo
®
Parallels Plesk Sitebuilder
Copyright Notice
    ISBN: N/A
    Parallels
    660 SW 39th Street
    Suite 205
    Renton, Washington 98057
    USA
    Phone: +1 (425) 282 6400
    Fax: +1 (425) 282 6444


    © Copyright 1999-2008,
    Parallels, Inc.
    All rights reserved


   Distribution of this work or derivative of this work in any form is prohibited unless prior written
permission is obtained from the copyright holder.
    Product and service names mentioned herein are the trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents

Preface                                                                                                                                               5
      About Parallels Plesk Sitebuilder .................................................................................................. 5
            What's New in This Version ................................................................................................ 6
      About This Guide ........................................................................................................................... 6
      Who Should Read This Guide ....................................................................................................... 7
      Typographical Conventions ........................................................................................................... 7
      Feedback ....................................................................................................................................... 8


Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard                                                                                                         9
      Overview of Main Steps to Create Site ....................................................................................... 10
      Logging In to Plesk Sitebuilder .................................................................................................... 10
      Learning Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard Interface ............................................................................... 11
             Working with Lists ............................................................................................................. 14
      Starting to Work with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard ........................................................................... 16
      Getting Help ................................................................................................................................. 17


Choosing Type of Created Site                                                                                                                       18


Creating Site Design                                                                                                                                19
      Selecting Design Template for Site ............................................................................................. 21
      Removing Design Template from Page ...................................................................................... 22
      Selecting Color Scheme .............................................................................................................. 23
      Selecting Banner ......................................................................................................................... 23
      Selecting Menu Style ................................................................................................................... 24
      Uploading Logo ........................................................................................................................... 25
      Specifying Site Title, Subtitle, and Footer Message .................................................................... 25
      Buying Pictures from Fotolia ....................................................................................................... 26


Creating Site Structure                                                                                                                             28
      Types of Pages ............................................................................................................................ 31
      Structuring Your Site ................................................................................................................... 32
            Adding Pages .................................................................................................................... 33
            Changing Position of Pages .............................................................................................. 33
            Renaming Pages ............................................................................................................... 35
            Hiding Pages in Site Navigation ........................................................................................ 35
            Removing Pages ............................................................................................................... 37
      Choosing Site Language, Currency, and Format of Numbers, Time and Date .......................... 37


Populating Site with Content                                                                                                                        39
      Working with Text ........................................................................................................................ 41
           Applying Styles, Fonts, and Colors to Text ....................................................................... 42
           Formatting Paragraphs ..................................................................................................... 42
           Copying and Moving Text ................................................................................................. 43
           Finding and Replacing Text Fragments ............................................................................ 44
Preface             4


           Checking Spelling on Page ............................................................................................... 45
           Undoing and Redoing Actions........................................................................................... 45
           Inserting Links ................................................................................................................... 46
      Working with Images ................................................................................................................... 54
           Inserting Image.................................................................................................................. 55
           Editing Image .................................................................................................................... 59
           Removing Image ............................................................................................................... 62
      Working with Tables .................................................................................................................... 62
           Inserting Table................................................................................................................... 63
           Editing Table Properties .................................................................................................... 64
           Adding or Removing Rows, Columns, and Cells .............................................................. 65
           Editing Cell Properties ....................................................................................................... 67
           Merging Cells .................................................................................................................... 68
           Spanning Cell across Several Rows or Columns ............................................................. 68
           Splitting Cell ...................................................................................................................... 69
           Adding Content to Table ................................................................................................... 69
           Removing Table ................................................................................................................ 70
      Working with Modules ................................................................................................................. 70
           Adding Blog ....................................................................................................................... 73
           Adding Image Gallery ........................................................................................................ 80
           Adding Online Store .......................................................................................................... 88
           Providing Content for Download ..................................................................................... 118
           Adding Flash Intro ........................................................................................................... 119
           Adding Forum .................................................................................................................. 120
           Adding Guestbook ........................................................................................................... 128
           Providing Registration to Your Site Visitors .................................................................... 132
           Incorporating Link to External Page into Your Site Menu ............................................... 138
           Adding Maps ................................................................................................................... 138
           Adding Feedback Form ................................................................................................... 143
           Adding RSS News Feeds ................................................................................................ 148
           Inserting Scripts into Your Web Pages ........................................................................... 150
           Conducting Polls and Online Surveys ............................................................................. 152
           Adding Online Status Indicator........................................................................................ 154
           Adding SitePal Animated Character ............................................................................... 155
           Adding Site Map .............................................................................................................. 159


Making Your Site Searchable                                                                                                                  160
      Specifying Keywords to be Used by Search Engines ............................................................... 160
      Providing Description to be Displayed in Search Results ......................................................... 161
      Submitting Site to Search Engines ............................................................................................ 161


Tracking Site Popularity                                                                                                                     162
      Enabling Statistics Count on Site .............................................................................................. 162
      Viewing Site Visitors Statistics .................................................................................................. 163
      Adding Visitors Counter to Site Pages ...................................................................................... 163


Publishing Site                                                                                                                              164
      Requirements to Host ................................................................................................................ 169


Appendix. Most Common Google Base Attributes                                                                                                 170
Preface   5




   Preface


   In this section:
   About Parallels Plesk Sitebuilder ....................................................................... 5
   About This Guide............................................................................................... 6
   Who Should Read This Guide ........................................................................... 7
   Typographical Conventions ............................................................................... 7
   Feedback .......................................................................................................... 8




About Parallels Plesk Sitebuilder
   Parallels Plesk Sitebuilder consists of two parts: the Wizard and the Administrator Panel.

   With Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard, you can create sites by simply choosing the design preset you
   like and adding text and images. Then you can add picture galleries, blogs and online stores
   in a few clicks. You do not need to know any markup or scripting languages to have a site.

   The Administrator Panel is a tool for managing and maintaining web sites created in the
   Wizard.

   In this section:
   What's New in This Version ............................................................................... 6
6      Preface




What's New in This Version
   Plesk Sitebuilder 4.5 offers the following new features:
      Site Map module. Allows you to display a clickable hierarchical model of your site structure
       to visitors
      Removing design template from pages. You can now remove design template's layout and
       graphics from the desired pages.
      External Page module. Allows you to link site menu items to external web sites.
      Save button. A handy way to save changes you make while working on your site.
      Counter settings are moved to the Wizard. You can now enable a counter on your site at the
       Pages step of the Wizard, which previously required going to the Administrator Panel.
      Site visitor management is moved to the Wizard. You can now manage your registered visitors
       through the Registration module editor at the Edit step of the Wizard, which previously
       required going to the Administrator Panel.
      Updated WYSIWYG editor to fix a series of issues.




About This Guide
   This guide instructs you how to create and publish sites on the Internet using Plesk
   Sitebuilder Wizard.

   This guide covers the following steps of creating and publishing your site:
   1   Choosing the type of site to be created (see page 18)
   2   Creating site design (see page 19)
   3   Creating and editing site structure (see page 28)
   4   Creating and editing site content (see page 39)
   5   Publishing site on the Internet (see page 164)
Preface       7




Who Should Read This Guide
  The target audience of this guide is regular users of Plesk Sitebuilder as well as guests, who
  are working with Plesk Sitebuilder in the guest mode, creating trial sites without publishing
  them on the Internet.



Typographical Conventions
  Before you start using this guide, it is important to understand the documentation
  conventions used in it.

  The following kinds of formatting in the text identify special information.

             Formatting         Type of information                    Example
             convention

   Special Bold              Items you must select,    Go to the Content tab.
                             such as menu options,
                             command buttons, or items
                             in a list.

                             Titles of chapters, sections, Read the Creating Site Design
                             and subsections.              chapter.

   Italics                   Used to emphasize the       Block modules. These modules
                             importance of a point, to   do not require dedicated site
                             introduce a term or to      pages...
                             designate a command line
                             placeholder, which is to be
                             replaced with a real name
                             or value.

   Monospace                 URLs, names of                Go to
                             commands, files, and          http://hostname/Wizard.
                             directories.

   CAPITALS                  Names of keys on the          SHIFT, CTRL, ALT
                             keyboard.

   KEY+KEY                   Key combinations for          CTRL+P, ALT+F4
                             which the user must press
                             and hold down one key
                             and then press another.
8      Preface




Feedback
  If you have found a mistake in this guide, or if you have suggestions or ideas on how to
  improve this guide, please send your feedback using the online form at
  http://www.parallels.com/en/support/usersdoc/. Please include in your report the guide's title,
  chapter and section titles, and the fragment of text in which you have found an error.
CHAPTER 1

Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder
Wizard
  This chapter describes your first steps with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard.

  In this chapter:
  Overview of Main Steps to Create Site .............................................................. 10
  Logging In to Plesk Sitebuilder .......................................................................... 10
  Learning Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard Interface ...................................................... 11
  Starting to Work with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard .................................................. 16
  Getting Help ...................................................................................................... 17
10       Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard




Overview of Main Steps to Create Site
     As a rule, the process of creating a web site includes three main stages: planning,
     implementation, and web site updating or maintenance.

     Planning: The first and most essential stage in any project is planning. Before starting
     with Plesk Sitebuilder, think about the purpose of your web site and its target audience.
     After this, decide where your web site will be stored, or, in Internet terminology, hosted.
     This stage is beyond the scope of this document. Since Plesk Sitebuilder is often
     provided in a bundle with a web hosting package, we assume that you already have a
     web space for publishing your site. Then, you create a detailed structure of your future
     web site and prepare its contents, including text information and graphics. The planning
     stage is extremely important because it eventually determines the usefulness of your
     web site.

     Implementation: The next stage is the implementation of your web site. The five-step
     Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard takes you through the entire process of creating your site,
     from initial design to publishing and maintenance. The following is an overview of the
     main steps required to create a web site using Plesk Sitebuilder:
     1     To create a web site, open Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. You can start working with the
           Wizard anonymously, without supplying login and password.
     2     Complete the first four Wizard steps (choose the site type, select the design, create
           the site structure, add web site content including text, graphics and site modules
           and provide extra information for search engines).
     3     Go to the Publish step and start the publishing process. If you do not have a Plesk
           Sitebuilder account and work with the program in demo mode, the site you create is
           temporary and cannot be published on the Internet until you register and buy
           hosting for your site. Once you are done with this, you can log in to Plesk
           Sitebuilder and assign your trial site to your account, thus making it possible to
           permanently publish your site on the Internet.
     Maintenance: When you complete the above steps, your site becomes available for
     visitors. It is critical to keep your site content fresh because this is a good way to show
     your attitude to customers and services. Therefore, we recommend to update your site
     on a regular basis. All you need to do is to log in to the Plesk Sitebuilder Administrator
     Panel, edit the site content in Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard, and click Publish. Sitebuilder will
     automatically transfer the updated content to your hosting location.

     For detailed instructions on what to do on every step of creating your site, see the
     chapters below.



Logging In to Plesk Sitebuilder
     The Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard access procedure is different for different user roles.
     Below we describe the login process for site owners and anonymous users. The Plesk
     Sitebuilder administrator and resellers access Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard from their
     Administrator Panels.
Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard   11



   To log in to Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard using your site owner account:
  1 Open your Internet browser.
  2 Enter the URL you have received from your Plesk Sitebuilder provider
    into the address bar of your browser and press ENTER.
     For example, http://sitebuilder/login
     where 'sitebuilder' is the domain name of the server where Plesk Sitebuilder is
     installed.
  3 Enter you user name and password, select the interface language and
    click Log in.
     If prior to gaining a Plesk Sitebuilder account you have created a trial site in Plesk
     Sitebuilder Wizard (on the same computer that you are logging in from), you will be
     prompted to assign the site to your account and thus upgrade it to regular. You can
     skip this step and register your trial site later, but note that it may be deleted by your
     Plesk Sitebuilder provider or automatically destroyed after the expiration date.
     Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard opens on the Start page, from which you can start creating
     your first site. You can proceed to your Administrator Panel by clicking the Go to
     Admin Panel shortcut at the top of the screen.

   To access Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard as an anonymous user (in demo mode):
  1 Open your Internet browser.
  2 Enter the URL to Plesk Sitebuilder demo version into the address bar
    of your browser and press ENTER.
     For example, http://sitebuilder/Wizard
     where 'sitebuilder' is the domain name of the server where Plesk Sitebuilder is
     installed.
     The link may be distributed by a Plesk Sitebuilder provider, or obtained otherwise.
  3 Select the language of Plesk Sitebuilder interface from the Interface
    language list.
     The Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard opens on the Overview page, which provides access to
     all five steps of the Wizard.



Learning Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard
Interface
  In Plesk Sitebuilder, a site is created in five steps. Each step has its own working and
  navigation principles, which will be covered in respective sections further in this guide.
  Here we will outline the general principles of working with the Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard
  interface, and enumerate elements present on all Plesk Sitebuilder screens.
12       Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard




                                  Figure 1: Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard Interface

     Every Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard window contains the following elements:
     1     Plesk Sitebuilder logo linked to the Sitebuilder page on the official Parallels web site.
           This image can be customized by your Plesk Sitebuilder provider.
     2     Save Changes button used for saving the results of actions performed on the page. If
           no changes have been applied, the button is inactive. This button is also disabled
           when editing the content of page modules on step Edit, since modules have their
           own dialogs for saving changes.
     3     Top help string, which provides short instructions about the operations you can
           perform on the current page and displays the result of your last action.
     4     Shortcuts used to switch between the five Wizard steps. The step you are currently
           on is highlighted in color.
     5        Support button, which, by default, opens Plesk Sitebuilder Online Server Support
           screen on the official Parallels web site, where you can fill in the form to request the
           help of Parallels technical support team. This link can be customized by your Plesk
           Sitebuilder provider.
     6         Help button opens the context-sensitive online help on the corresponding page.
     7       Go to Admin Panel shortcut takes you to your Plesk Sitebuilder Administrator
           Panel.
     8     Parallels logotype image linked to Parallels web site.
     9         Log out button finishes your current session with Plesk Sitebuilder.
Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard                13



     Note: The Go to Admin Panel and Log out buttons are not displayed to anonymous
     users. Instead of the Log out button, they see a shortcut                          Already a registered user?
     Log in here..
10 Work area, where the interface options available on the current step of the Wizard
   are displayed.
11      Back button, which enables you to get to the previous step of the Wizard (you
     can also return to the previous step using the top navigation bar).
12       Preview button, which allows you to preview the site at any stage of its creation.
13      Next button, which switches you to the next step of creating your site (you can
     also click the next tab in the top navigation bar).

     In this section:
     Working with Lists ..............................................................................................14
14    Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard




Working with Lists
     When setting up page or block modules on the Edit step of Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard,
     you will see lists of various system objects (blog posts, online store orders, etc.).

     In such a list, each object record is a table row displaying the object name and the
     relevant parameters of the object (for example, for each forum topic, the author of the
     topic, the category the topic belongs to, the date of last the update, and the number of
     replies to the topic are displayed). Above and below each list, the total number of items
     contained in the list is displayed. Below the list, you can adjust the number of items to
     be displayed per page (5, 10, 25, or 100). In multi-page lists, you can navigate between
     the pages by clicking the page number shortcuts above and below the list. To go to the
     first/last page of the list, click First Page or Last Page, accordingly.

     In lengthy lists, you can find items using the search function, or sort items by certain
     parameters. To find an item, type a search criterion into the input box above the list,
     and click Search. The list will show the items matching the search criterion. To return to
     the full list of items, click Show All.




                                       Figure 2: Searching for Objects

     To sort list items by a certain parameter in ascending or descending order, click the
     parameter's title in the column heading. The order of sorting will be indicated by a small
     triangle displayed next to the parameter's title.




                                           Figure 3: Sorting Objects

     In some lists, you can filter items by a certain attribute by selecting one of them from
     the drop-down list (for example, on the Orders tab of your eShop page, you can filter out
     orders of certain status: New, Paid, Processed, Backorder, Completed, Cancelled, Failed, or
     Any).




                                          Figure 4: Filtering Objects
Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard   15



Note: All the above described principles also apply to the list of design template
categories on the Design step of the Wizard. For information on using these options on
the Design step, read section Creating Site Design (on page 19).

To choose a list object for further operation, select the check box to the left of the
object's name.




                      Figure 5: Selecting Particular Objects in a List

To choose all objects in the list, select the check box at the head of the column.




                        Figure 6: Selecting All List Objects at Once

To perform operations with certain objects in a list, select the required objects and click
an operation shortcut above the list (for example, Activate, Deactivate, Remove Selected,
etc.).

In the list of guestbook messages, the status of a message is indicated by icon in the
Status (S) column (not archived   or archived ).

In most lists, individual operation shortcuts are displayed for each item. For example,
for each product category on the Categories tab on the eShop page, there are arrows (
and ) used to change the order in which the categories are displayed on the site
page; and the       Edit icon used to open the categories in editing mode.

In most lists, you can configure or edit a list object by:
   Clicking the object name, if it is clickable (for example, the post names on the
    Content tab of the Blog page)
   Clicking the     Edit icon for this object in the list (for example, for a product on the
    Products tab of the eShop page)
In some lists, you will also see shortcuts to managing the objects' dependent items -
such as the View/Edit Comments shortcut for each blog post on the Content tab of the Blog
page.
16       Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard



     In most object lists in the Wizard, you will find default objects created for your
     convenience, which you can delete or reuse at a later stage.



Starting to Work with Plesk Sitebuilder
Wizard
     The Overview page provides quick access to and contains short description of each of
     the five steps required for creating a site in Plesk Sitebuilder.




                              Figure 7: Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard Overview Page

     The five Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard steps are as follows:
     1     Start. On this step, you choose whether to create a site from scratch or create a site
           using one of the proposed site templates (site-blog, site-photo gallery, etc.).
     2     Design. On this step, you configure your site layout, color scheme, menu style, logo
           and banner, as well as set up text elements appeared at the background of your
           site, such as the title phrase and the copyright notice.
     3     Pages. On this step, you configure the structure of your site and arrange the pages
           hierarchy in the site map.
     4     Edit. On this step, you create and edit the content of your site pages.
     5     Publish. On this step, you publish your site on the Internet.

     For anonymous users, on the Overview page, the       Interface language box is displayed
     allowing to select the language of the Wizard interface.
Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard   17



  To start creating your site, click   Start at the bottom of the screen.



Getting Help
  If you encounter a problem while using Plesk Sitebuilder, there are several resources
  available to help you troubleshoot the problem:
     Use on-screen context-sensitive help.
      At the bottom of the navigation pane, you can find short instructions on the
      operations that are available on the current page.
     Refer to our knowledge base (http://kb.parallels.com/en/products/sitebuilderlinux).
      The knowledge base provides solutions to the most common problems with Plesk
      Sitebuilder.
     Go to our forum
      (http://forum.swsoft.com/forumdisplay.php?s=f2b895fc3636e705ec9b9a85ef81f040
      &forumid=99).
      Here all users can post questions, exchange ideas, and troubleshoot issues not
      described in the knowledge base. Note that Parallels does not provide official
      support through this forum.
     Contact technical support.
      If you have any problems or questions that are not covered in the user
      documentation or knowledge base, you can click      Support located on the
      navigation pane and submit your problem to your technical support representative.
CHAPTER 2

Choosing Type of Created Site
  The first step of creating site with Plesk Sitebuilder is to choose whether you want to
  start creating your site from scratch or use one of proposed site templates (the so-
  called site families). By default, there are two site templates available - blog and image
  gallery, but the Plesk Sitebuilder administrator can extend this list by creating custom
  site templates and including them in your service plan.

  To choose the type of the created site, go to the Start step and click the required site
  family to select it.

  The Start page looks as follows:




                           Figure 8: Step 1. Choosing the Site Type

  The chosen site family is indicated with the       sign.

  Having selected a site family, click Next at the bottom of the screen to proceed to
  configuring the design of your site.

  If you fail to select a certain site family (and you see it in the list as grayed out), contact
  your Plesk Sitebuilder administrator for assistance.
Creating Site Design   19




Creating Site Design
  In Plesk Sitebuilder, you can build the graphic design of your site by combining the
  provided presets with your custom design elements which you can upload to
  Sitebuilder. Plesk Sitebuilder offers design presets of several types, including: design
  templates, color schemes, page banners and site menu styles. You can personalize
  your design by uploading a custom page banner and logo. Besides uploading your own
  banner and logo, you can specify the title, subtitle and footer message for your site. In
  this chapter you will find a step-by-step instruction on creating your site design in Plesk
  Sitebuilder.

  The Plesk Sitebuilder Design step screen looks as follows.




                            Figure 9: Step 2. Creating Site Design

  The work area of the screen contains the following elements:
  1   Design template selection area, which provides the functions facilitating the choice of a
      site design template (see page 21). When you choose to display All categories, this
      area shows all available design templates.
20       Creating Site Design


     2     Design template preview window displaying the currently selected template. Click this
           window for full-size preview of the template. The chosen design template, color
           scheme and menu style are shown in red frames in the corresponding areas of the
           screen.
     3     Color schemes area, where you can choose the colors for your site (see page 23).
     4     Banners area enabling you to select or upload a banner for your site (see page 23).
     5     Menu styles area, where you can choose the appearance of the site menu (see page 24).
     6     Logo area enabling you to upload your custom logo (see page 25).
     7     Site info area where you can provide the information to be displayed in the header and
           footer of your site pages (see page 25).
     8     The design template list navigation area.
     Read this chapter to learn how to use these options to create your site design.

     In this section:
     Selecting Design Template for Site ................................................................... 21
     Removing Design Template from Page ............................................................. 22
     Selecting Color Scheme .................................................................................... 23
     Selecting Banner ............................................................................................... 23
     Selecting Menu Style......................................................................................... 24
     Uploading Logo ................................................................................................. 25
     Specifying Site Title, Subtitle, and Footer Message ........................................... 25
     Buying Pictures from Fotolia .............................................................................. 26
Creating Site Design    21




Selecting Design Template for Site
  On this step, you choose the general graphic and layout concept of the site page - the
  site design template. For more convenience, design templates are grouped into
  categories which correspond to the most frequently encountered site types. Your
  choice of the design template defines the choice of available color schemes, menu
  styles and page banners further on this step.

  The list of available site design templates is determined by your service plan.

   To select a design template for your site:
  1 On the Design step, select a template category from the Category list.
     The default design template which goes with the category is displayed in the main
     design preview window; the alternative ones - in smaller windows beside the main
     window.
  2 Click a design template to select it.
     The selected template appears in the main design preview window. By selecting a
     design template you can view the color schemes, menu styles and page banners
     which go with it in the respective areas of the page.
     Each design template has a unique alphanumeric code (for example, (vap-26, eug-
     29, etc.) by which you can identify it in Plesk Sitebuilder.
  To choose a design template on pure aesthetic grounds (not by category), select All
  Categories from the Category list to display all available templates, and then click the
  desired template to select it.

  For some tips on working with the list of design templates, see section Working with Lists
  (on page 14).

  If necessary, you can remove the design template (see page 22) from selected standard
  (HTML) pages of your site at a later stage.
22    Creating Site Design




                             Figure 10: Selecting a Design Template



Removing Design Template from Page
     All pages of your Plesk Sitebuilder site are built on the basis of a design template - the
     one which you have applied on the Design step and which includes pre-configured page
     graphics and layout. You can remove these elements from any common (standard)
     page (indicated by the     icon in the site map), turning it into a plain page with no
     design.

     To remove the design template from a page, go to the Edit step, select the page in the
     Site map area and click Remove Design Template.

     At any moment later you can get the page design back by clicking Restore Design
     Template.

     You cannot remove the design template from special pages (modules).
Creating Site Design   23




Selecting Color Scheme
  For each design template, a number of color schemes are available. No custom color
  schemes can be uploaded to Plesk Sitebuilder.

  To select color scheme for your site, on the Design step, click the thumbnail image you
  like in the Color schemes section.

  The chosen color scheme is applied to the design template, and the results are
  displayed on the design template preview.




                           Figure 11: Selecting a Color Scheme



Selecting Banner
  In Plesk Sitebuilder, a banner is a large image of rectangular shape which serves as a
  central element of the page layout. Each design template offers a choice of available
  banners.

   To select a banner:
  1 On the Design step, in the Banners area, click the downward arrow to
    expand the list of available banners.
  2 Select the banner you like.
  The chosen banner is displayed it in the main design preview window.

  You can also upload a custom banner for your site. The maximum allowed dimensions
  of a custom banner are 1024x350 px. The supported file formats are *.jpg, *.bmp, *.gif,
  *.png.
24       Creating Site Design



      To upload a new banner:
     1     On the Design step, click Browse in the Banners area.
     2     In the Browse window, navigate to the image file you want to upload.
     3     Click Open in the Browse window.
     4     Click Upload in the Banners area.




                                Figure 12: Selecting or Uploading a Banner



Selecting Menu Style
     Menu style defines the visual appearance of the menu items on your site.

     To select the menu style, on the Design step, choose the preferable style in the Menu
     styles area.

     For each design template, there are a number of menu styles to choose from.




                                    Figure 13: Selecting a Menu Style
Creating Site Design       25




Uploading Logo
   In Plesk Sitebuilder, a logo is a small image displayed at the top of each page, within
   the page banner. The maximum size of logo image is 320x320 px; the supported file
   formats are *.bmp, *.gif, *.jpg, *.png.

    To upload a custom logo:
   1   On the Design step, click Browse in the Logo area.
   2   In the Browse window, navigate to the image file you want to upload.
   3   Click Open in the Browse window.
   4   Click Upload in the Logo area.
   For each template, Plesk Sitebuilder provides its own default logo image. To restore
   this logo, click Restore Default.

   To remove logo from your site design, click Clear.




                                  Figure 14: Uploading a Logo



Specifying Site Title, Subtitle, and Footer
Message
   Site title, subtitle, and footer message are text elements appeared at the background of
   your site: site title and subtitle are displayed within the site banner, and footer message
   is put at the bottom of every page of your site.

   To specify your site title, subtitle phrase and footer message, on the Design step, fill in
   the fields in the Site info section:
26       Creating Site Design


          In the Site title field, provide your site name (maximum 255 characters). On
           business sites, this is usually a company name.
          In the Subtitle field, provide any phrase which reflects the concept and objectives of
           the site. This phrase will be displayed below the site title in smaller font. On
           business sites, this is usually a corporate slogan.
          In the Footer message field, provide the copyright notice or any other information of
           similar kind - disclaimers, contact information, etc., which you would like to place in
           the page footer.
     For each text element, it is possible to break the text into multiple lines. To do so, insert
     the <br> tag where you want the line break to be. For example: first line<br>second
     line<br>third line...

     If you do not wish to specify the title, subtitle or footer message for your site, clear the
     corresponding fields.

     Note: Some design templates allow customizing only the site title. For these templates,
     the Subtitle and Footer message fields are disabled.




                      Figure 15: Specifying Site's Title, Subtitle, and Footer Message



Buying Pictures from Fotolia
     In Plesk Sitebuilder, you can buy images from Fotolia (http://www.fotolia.com/parallels/)
     - the first worldwide social marketplace for royalty free stock images, directly from the
     Wizard. As a Parallels customer, you have a 20% bonus when purchasing Fotolia
     images.

      To purchase images from Fotolia:
     1 On the Design step, click the                Buy pictures shortcut under the Color
       schemes area.
     2 Follow the instructions provided on Fotolia web site to purchase
       images.
Creating Site Design     27



Note: If you do not see this shortcut, it means that this option is disabled in the Plesk
Sitebuilder license.

Note that when filling your site with content on the Edit step, you can browse the Fotolia
gallery and buy images directly from Plesk Sitebuilder (see Inserting Image (on page
55)).




                         Figure 16: Buying Pictures from Fotolia
CHAPTER 3

Creating Site Structure
  A site consists of several pages linked together to present information in an ordered
  way. Using Plesk Sitebuilder, you can arrange the pages in the two levels of hierarchy:
  top level pages and second level pages. Therefore, before this stage you must clearly
  understand how you intend to structure your site.

  Note: The maximum number of pages you can create in one site is determined by your
  service plan.

  To facilitate creating your site, you are provided with a number of pre-defined site
  structures, or page sets, which can be used as templates for creating your own site
  structure. The default page set of your site is determined by the type of site you chose
  on the Start page of Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard.

  On the Pages step, you can build any possible site structure by adding the desired
  pages and arranging them as needed. Find out about the types of pages (see page 31)
  offered by Plesk Sitebuilder and about the process of building site structure (see page
  32).

  The Pages step screen provides the following functionalities:
Creating Site Structure    29




                          Figure 17: Step 3. Creating Site Structure
1   The Page sets area allows you to choose a page set. The selected page set is
    shown in red frame.
2   The Standard pages area displays the structure of the page set chosen in the Page
    sets area. You can expand or collapse this section by clicking the          or      icons in
    the top bar of the section.
3   The Your site structure area shows the final structure of your site.
4   The Page position area enables you to organize the hierarchy of pages (see page 33) in
    the site map, and to rename pages (see page 35).

5                 and            buttons allow you add or remove pages from the site
    structure.
6   The Site regional and language options area allows you to set the site language and
    the format of numeric data. You can expand or collapse this section by clicking the
       or        icons.
7   The Special pages area displays all available types of pages which can be added to
    your site structure: one common text page, and all available page modules. You
    can expand or collapse this section by clicking the       or      icons.
8   The check box enabling you to add a visitors counter to your site (see page 163).
30     Creating Site Structure



     In this chapter:
     Types of Pages ................................................................................................. 31
     Structuring Your Site ......................................................................................... 32
     Choosing Site Language, Currency, and Format of Numbers, Time and Date... 37
Creating Site Structure   31




Types of Pages
  In Plesk Sitebuilder, there are two types of pages:
     Standard (common) pages - ordinary HTML pages used for displaying text
      information. Such pages are marked with icons in the site map.
     Special pages - page modules which extend the site functionality. Each module is
      designed for a certain purpose and is identified by its own icon. There are the
      following types of page modules in Plesk Sitebuilder:
            Blog (see page 73). Supports a standard set of blog functionality: posting,
          commenting, content categorizing, etc. A Blog page is very convenient for
          organizing the News, Events and similar pages on sites.
            Image Gallery (see page 80). Allows you to share images or photos online.
          Supports batch image upload with group editing functions, organizing images
          into albums, etc.
            eShop (see page 88). Online store creation and management tool featuring
          shopping cart, multi-currency, categorized product catalog with thumbnail
          upload capability, product inventory and shipping cost support, order
          management. Provides integration with a number of online payment systems,
          such as PayPal, Authorize.Net, and others.
             File Download (see page 118). Allows providing content for download to site
          visitors.
          Note: Each File Download page can hold only one file. To provide several files
             for download, it is necessary to add several File Download pages to the site
             structure.
           Flash Intro (see page 119). A pre-designed flash introduction to your site. It is
          possible to choose between several designs of the intro and insert your own text
          content into it.
          Note: The Flash Intro module is the only page module that requires no PHP on
             the publishing location and therefore can be included into a static site.
           Forum (see page 120). Allows you to set up a forum where visitors can post
          questions and participate in discussions.
           Guestbook (see page 128). Allows you to create a guestbook and manage the
          posted messages.
             Registration (see page 132). Allows you to set up voluntary user
          authentication on sites. After a registered site visitor opts in, their details are
          automatically inputted in all forms they open on the site, for example, when
          submitting a forum topic or shopping at the online store. You can suspend a
          visitor account, thus restricting a visitor from authenticating under his or her user
          name.
            External Page (see page 138). Allows incorporating links to external pages into
          the site menu.
  The list of available modules is determined by your service plan.
32     Creating Site Structure



     In Plesk Sitebuilder, you can add several page modules of one type to a site (except for
     Flash Intro and Registration).



Structuring Your Site
     You can build and edit your site structure on the Pages step of Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard.
     To facilitate creating your site, you are provided with a number of pre-defined site
     structures, or page sets, which can be used as templates for creating your own site
     structure. The default page set of your site is determined by the type of site you chose
     on the Start page of Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. You see this default page set highlighted
     in the list of page sets, its structure is displayed in the Your site structure box on the right.
     You can modify the proposed site structure as desired by adding pages from other
     page sets (or even whole page sets), renaming pages, changing pages hierarchy, or
     removing pages from the Your site structure box.

     The list of page sets available depends on your service plan and can be extended only
     by your Plesk Sitebuilder administrator. The structure of each page set is shown in the
     Standard pages area after you select the page set in the list.

     The Special pages area shows a list of special pages, or modules which you can add to
     your site, plus one common site page which you can use as an ordinary text page. To
     learn which modules are available, refer to Types of Pages (on page 31).

     In this section:
     Adding Pages .................................................................................................... 33
     Changing Position of Pages .............................................................................. 33
     Renaming Pages ............................................................................................... 35
     Hiding Pages in Site Navigation ........................................................................ 35
     Removing Pages ............................................................................................... 37
Creating Site Structure   33




Adding Pages
    To add pages to the site structure:
   1 Select the necessary pages in the Standard pages, or in the Special pages
     area.
      Note: The module titles in the page set may differ from the original names of the
      modules. For example, a page      Photo may represent the      Image Gallery module.
      You can always identify a module by its icon.

   2 Click               .
      Or just drag and drop needed pages into the Your site structure box.
   You can add as many modules of one type to your site as you wish - except for the
   Flash Intro and Registration modules. These modules can be added to your site only
   once.




                                   Figure 18: Adding Pages


Changing Position of Pages
    To change the pages hierarchy:
   1 Select the required page in the Your site structure box.
   2 Use one of the buttons in the Page position area:
         To move a page from the second level to the top level of the site structure, click
          Left.
         To move a page from the top level to the second level, click Right.
34    Creating Site Structure


           To move a page up at the same level, click Up.
           To move a page down at the same level, click Down.
        When you move a first level page Up or Down, all dependent second level pages are
        moved together with it.

     Note: In Plesk Sitebuilder, modules can be only first-level pages in the site structure,
     and cannot have dependent second level pages. The only exception is the File
     Download module, which you can set a second-level page, but you cannot depend other
     pages on it.




                                Figure 19: Changing Position of Pages
Creating Site Structure   35




Renaming Pages
    To rename a page:
   1 Select the page in the Your site structure box and click Rename.
      Or just double-click the page's name to make it editable.
   2 Provide a new name for the page.
   3 Press ENTER.
   If you choose to rename the page at a later stage, you can use the Page title field on the
   Edit step of the Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard.




                                 Figure 20: Renaming Pages


Hiding Pages in Site Navigation
   You can make certain pages invisible in site menu. The page which you choose to hide
   will be accessible only by clicking a link placed on other pages of your site (or wherever
   you would like to place it). Note that when a site visitor actually accesses a hidden
   page, it appears in the site menu, and when they switch to another (not hidden) page,
   the hidden page disappears again.

   To hide a page in the site navigation menu:
   1 Go to the Edit step.
   2 Go to the desired page.
   3 Clear the Show this page in site map check box.
      Hidden pages are highlighted with grey color in the Site map area and in the site
      structure on the Pages step.
36       Creating Site Structure




                                   Figure 21: Hiding Pages in Site Navigation

     You can hide both first and second level pages.

     To understand how hiding pages correlates with pages hierarchy, see the example
     below:

     Let the site structure look as follows:
          Page 1
          Page 2 (hidden)
          Page 3
              Page 3.1 (hidden)
              Page 3.2
          Page 4 (hidden)
              Page 4.1
              Page 4.2 (hidden)
     To understand the dependency of pages' visibility and position in the hierarchy, see the
     table below.

                     Active Page*                          Visible Pages

     Page 1                                      Page 1, Page 3
     Page 2                                      Page 1, Page 2, Page 3
     Page 3                                      Page 1, Page 3, Page 3.2
     Page 3.1                                    Page 1, Page 3, Page 3.1, Page 3.2
     Page 3.2                                    Page 1, Page 3, Page 3.2
     Page 4                                      Page 1, Page 3, Page 4, Page 4.1
     Page 4.1                                    Page 1, Page 3, Page 4.1
     Page 4.2                                    Page 1, Page 3, Page 4.1, Page 4.2

     * active page is a page where the site visitor currently stands
Creating Site Structure    37




Removing Pages
  To remove a page from the site map, select the page in the Your site structure box and
  click          .

  Note: You cannot delete all pages from the Your site structure area. In case you need to
  clear the space - for example, before setting up a completely new site structure, we
  recommend to select all pages, except one, delete them, add the necessary pages to
  the site, and then delete or reuse the old page.




                                Figure 22: Removing Pages



Choosing Site Language, Currency, and
Format of Numbers, Time and Date
  In Plesk Sitebuilder, you can create a site in the language which is different from the
  language of your Wizard interface. The desired language is selected on the Pages step
  of Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard.

  The choice of the language determines the format of numbers, the site currency and
  price format, and also the format of date and time records everywhere on your site.

   To select the language for your site and the format of displaying numbers, currencies,
    times and dates:
  1 Go to the Pages step.
  2 Select the language of your site from the Interface language list.
38    Creating Site Structure



     In the Standards and formats area, you will see the format of numbers, date and time, and
     the currency associated with the chosen language.

     If you do not see a required language in the list, check Parallels web site
     (http://www.parallels.com/en/download/sitebuilder) to see if it is available. Only a user
     with administrator's privileges can download and install language packs in Plesk
     Sitebuilder. If you wish to use any of the available language packs, contact your Plesk
     Sitebuilder provider for assistance.

     Note that the currency and price format specified here will be applied to your online
     store, if you add one to your site. You can alter these settings for your online store at a
     later stage by configuring the eShop module accordingly (see page 100). The online store
     settings and the regional and language settings of the whole site are independent of
     each other.




     Figure 23: Choosing Site Language and Customizing Settings for Display of Numbers,
                                 Currencies, Time and Date
CHAPTER 4

Populating Site with Content
  In Plesk Sitebuilder, creating your site content means creating the content of each
  HTML page constituting your site, and setting up functional modules you added to your
  site. You can do all this on the Edit step of Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard.

  The Plesk Sitebuilder editor is organized in such a way that the information you type on
  the pages and the design of the pages are independent. Therefore, you can completely
  change the design for a page after you had typed a text on this page, without having to
  retype the information.

  The Edit step screen is structured in the following way:




                      Figure 24: Step 4. Populating Site with Content
40       Populating Site with Content


     1     Site map area shows the site structure created on the Pages step of the Wizard. By
           selecting a page in this area, you open its content for editing in the work area of the
           screen. To hide the Site map section, click the   Hide Site Map icon. To restore the
           Site map area on the screen, click the    Show Site Map icon.
     2     Work area provides access to different functions, depending on the type of the edited
           page:
              On ordinary text pages, the work area provides the space for creating the text
               content of the page (see page 41) and inserting images (see page 54) with the help
               of the WYSIWYG editor, like on the screenshot above.
              On special pages, or page modules, the work area provides the module editor
               screen, where you can configure various parameters of the module on the
               respective tabs, and, in most cases, populate the module with content (for
               example, fill your online store catalog with products). For information on working
               with lists of objects on module management pages, read section Working with
               Lists (on page 14). For more information about configuring and editing each
               module, see respective sections further in this chapter.
     3     Modules area allows to embed block modules in text pages, by drag-and-dropping
           the module icon to the required spot on the page. For some tips on using block
           modules, see section Working with Modules (on page 70). To hide the Modules
           section, click the  Hide Modules icon. To restore the Modules area on the screen,
           click the    Show Modules icon.
           Note: When you edit special pages (page modules), the Modules area of the screen
           is not displayed.

           In this chapter:
           Working with Text ..............................................................................................41
           Working with Images..........................................................................................54
           Working with Tables...........................................................................................62
           Working with Modules ........................................................................................70
Populating Site with Content          41




Working with Text
  Plesk Sitebuilder is empowered with a user-friendly WYSIWYG (What You See Is What
  You Get) content editor, which enables you to see the content on the display screen
  exactly as it appears on the Internet.

  This subsection describes the ways of working with textual information on your web
  pages. You will learn how to format characters and paragraphs, cut, copy, paste text,
  insert images and links, check spelling, and more.




                                            Figure 25: Working with Text

  In this section:
  Applying Styles, Fonts, and Colors to Text ........................................................ 42
  Formatting Paragraphs ...................................................................................... 42
  Copying and Moving Text .................................................................................. 43
  Finding and Replacing Text Fragments ............................................................. 44
  Checking Spelling on Page ............................................................................... 45
  Undoing and Redoing Actions ........................................................................... 45
  Inserting Links ................................................................................................... 46
42    Populating Site with Content




Applying Styles, Fonts, and Colors to Text
      To apply formatting to a text:
     1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page.
     2 Select the text fragment you want to edit.

        You can select the whole text on the page by clicking              Select All.
     3 Apply desired formatting options to the selected text:
           Select a font from the Font list.
           Select a font size from the Size list.

           Click the         Text Color icon and select a color.

           Click the         Background Color icon and select a color.

           Click the        Bold,     Italic,    Underline,    Strike Through icons to make the
            text bold, italic, underlined, or strikethrough respectively.

           Click the     Subscript or        Superscript icon to make the text subscript or
            superscript respectively.
     4 To insert a special symbol into the text, place the mouse cursor on
        the required spot on the page, click the                    Insert Special Character icon
        and select a symbol.

     To undo the last formatting action, click the            Remove Format or       Undo icon.


Formatting Paragraphs
      To apply formatting to a paragraph:
     1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page.
     2 Place the cursor anywhere in the paragraph you want to format.
     3 Apply necessary formatting:
           To apply a text style, select it from the Format list.

           To align the text, click the        Align Left,      Center,    Align Right, or
            Justify icon.

           To change the indentation of the text, click the           Increase Indent or
            Decrease Indent icon.
     4 To insert a horizontal line between two paragraphs, place the cursor
        at the end of the first paragraph and click the                     Insert Horizontal Line
        icon.
Populating Site with Content           43



   5 To split a paragraph with a page break, click the   Insert Page Break
     icon before the beginning of the new prospective paragraph.


Copying and Moving Text
    To copy or move text:
   1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page.
   2 Select a text fragment.

      You can select the whole text of the page by clicking the        Select All icon.

   3 Click the    Cut or    Copy, icon depending on the type of operation
     (moving or copying).
   4 Paste the text on the page using one of the three pasting options:
         To simply paste the text from the current page, or from other pages of the site,
          place the cursor in the appropriate spot on the page and click the          Paste icon.
         To paste the text from MS Word, and to retain the formatting applied to it, click
          the      Paste from Word icon, paste the text into the provided window, and click
          OK.

         To paste the text, and to discard all formatting applied to it, click the          Paste
          as Plain Text icon, paste the text into the provided window, and click OK.
44    Populating Site with Content




Finding and Replacing Text Fragments
      To find a particular text fragment on the page:
     1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page.

     2 Click the      Find icon.
     3 In the Find what field, enter the text you want to find.
     4 Select the Match case check box to search only for text that exactly
       matches the case (uppercase or lowercase character formatting) of
       the specified search pattern.
     5 Click Find to start the search.
      To find and replace a text fragment on the page:

     1 Click the     Replace icon.
     2 In the Find what field, enter the text you want to find.
     3 In the Replace with field, enter the text to replace the searched fragment
       with.
     4 Select the necessary search options:
           Match case - to search for text that exactly matches the case (uppercase or
            lowercase character formatting) for the specified search pattern.
           Match whole words - to search for the exact phrase as it is specified.
     5 Click Replace to replace a particular found segment.
     6 Click Replace All to replace all segments found on the page without
       reviewing them.
Populating Site with Content   45




Checking Spelling on Page
   The Spell Checker feature can be used only with Internet Explorer version 5.5 or later.
   To be able to use the Spell Checker, you need to install ieSpell - a free-of-charge spell
   checker utility for Internet Explorer. To install ieSpell, download the application setup
   package from the official ieSpell web site (http://www.iespell.com/download.php), run it
   on your computer and complete the steps of the installation procedure as described,
   then restart Internet Explorer.

   The Spell Checker is available for English only.

    To check spelling on the page:
   1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page.
   2 Click the        Check Spell icon.
      In the Not in dictionary field, possible spelling mistakes are shown.
   3 If you are sure that the word found by the Spell Checker is not
     misspelled, click Ignore to leave the word as is.
      To ignore all occurrences of this word in the text, click Ignore All.
   4 If you wish to add this word to the Spell Checker dictionary, click Add.
   5 If you want to replace the misspelled word with the word in the
     Suggestions field, click Change.
      To replace this word in the whole text, click Change All.
   6 If you wish to configure the Spell Checker parameters, click Options.


Undoing and Redoing Actions
   To undo the last action, click     Undo.

   To redo the last undone action, click       Redo.
46       Populating Site with Content




Inserting Links
     Using the Plesk Sitebuilder editor, you can insert both internal links leading to other
     pages of your site, and external links. Internal links point to other pages of your site.
     External links pointing to other sites are often used to improve your site popularity and
     will direct visitors of your site to friendly sites (the so-called link exchange).

     With the help of Plesk Sitebuilder link manager, you can add the following types of
     links:
          External links (see page 47)
          Internal links, or links to other pages of your site (see page 50)
          Anchors (see page 50)
          E-mail links (see page 52)
     To edit a link, right-click the selected link and click Edit Link.

     To remove a link, right-click the selected link and click Remove Link, or select the link
     text and click the             Remove Link icon on the editor panel.

     In this section:
     Inserting External Link ....................................................................................... 47
     Inserting Internal Link ........................................................................................ 50
     Inserting Anchor ................................................................................................ 50
     Inserting E-Mail Link .......................................................................................... 52
Populating Site with Content   47



Inserting External Link
    An external link is a reference in a hypertext document to another document on a
    different web site.

     To insert an external link:
    1 Type/Select the text which you want to set as a hyperlink to another
      web resource.

    2 Click the         Insert/Edit Link icon.




                              Figure 26: Inserting an External Link
    3 On the Link Info tab, select URL from the Link type list.
    4 Select the protocol from the Protocol list.
       The available selections are:
          http://
          https://
          ftp://
          news://
          <other>
    5 In the URL field, enter the web address to which the link will point.
    6 On the Target tab, select the way the link should open from the Target
      list:
          To open the link in same browser window (the target page replaces the page of
           your site), leave the Target option in its default value <not set>, and leave the
           Target Frame Name field blank.
48    Populating Site with Content


           To open the link in the new browser window, select New Window [_blank] from the
            Target list.
           To open the link as a pop-up window, select <popup window> from the Target list,
            and specify the parameters of the pop-up in the Popup Window Features area
            below.
             Note: Other options in the Target list have been designed to work with the HTML
                Frames technology, which is currently not used on Plesk Sitebuilder sites.
                On non-frames sites, all these options open the link in the same window.
     7 If you wish to specify additional attributes for the link, enter them on
       the Advanced tab:
        Id, this attribute assigns a name to the link. This name must be unique on the page.
        Language Direction, this attribute specifies the base direction of directionally neutral
        text. Direction can be Left-to-right or Right-to-left.
        Access Key, this attribute assigns an access key to an element. An access key is a
        single character from the document character set.
        Name, this attribute names the current link as an anchor, so that it may be the
        destination of another link. The value of this attribute must be a unique anchor
        name within the current page.
        Language Code, this attribute specifies the base language of the link's attribute
        values and text content.
        Tab Index, this attribute specifies the position of the current element in the tabbing
        order for the current document. The tabbing order defines the order in which
        elements receive focus when navigated by the user via the keyboard. The tabbing
        order may include elements nested within other elements.
        Advisory Title, this attribute offers advisory information about the link. The
        information is displayed in the status bar of the browser when the mouse hovers
        over the link.
        Advisory Content Type, this attribute gives an advisory hint as to the content type of
        the content available at the link target address. It allows user agents to opt to use a
        fallback mechanism rather than fetch the content if they are advised that they will
        get content in a content type they do not support.
        Stylesheet Classes, this attribute assigns a CSS class name or set of class names to
        the link.
        Linked Resource Charset, this attribute specifies the character encoding of the
        resource designated by the link.
        Style, this attribute specifies style information for the current link. The information
        should be formatted as follows: Content-Style-Type: text/css.
     8 Click OK.
     You can also provide a link to an image, document or a media file stored on your
     computer.

      To provide a link to a file on your computer:
     1 Type/Select the text which you want to set as a hyperlink.
     2 Click the Insert/Edit Link icon.
Populating Site with Content     49


3   On the Link Info tab, select URL from the Link type list.
4   Select <other> from the Protocol check box.
5   Click Browse Server.
6   In the file uploading window, select the type of file from the Resource
    type box: File, Image, Flash, or Media.
    Inside each resource type, you can organize your files into a number of folders. To
    do so, create the desired hierarchy of folders prior to uploading the files. To create
    a folder in the root directory, click Add New Folder in the bottom part of the screen.
    Having created a folder, click its name to open it. You can create a new folder
    inside the opened folder, or upload a file to it.
    When the folder is opened, the top bar of the file uploading screen shows the path
    to this folder on the server, and the left frame provides navigation to the upper-level
    folder. To navigate one level up, click the .. icon.
7 To upload a file of the selected type to the server, click Browse, locate
  the file in your local file system, click Open and then click Upload.
    For each uploaded file, size is shown.
    To delete a file, click the corresponding    icon.
8 To create a link to the file, click the file name.




                            Figure 27: Inserting a Link to a File
    The path to the file on the server is automatically inputted into the URL field on the
    Link screen.
9 Click OK.
50    Populating Site with Content



Inserting Internal Link
     An internal link is a link to another page of your site.

      To insert an internal link:
     1 Type/Select the text which you want to set as a link to another page.
     2 From the Custom links box on the WYSIWYG panel, select the page to
       which the link should point.




                       Figure 28: Inserting a Link to Another Page of Your Site

Inserting Anchor
     Anchor is a word or a group of words that define the destination a hyperlink leads to.
     Anchors are very helpful in facilitating navigation through a great amount of text located
     on a single place. With this function you can provide the site visitors an easy way to
     jump from one part of the text to another.

      To insert an anchor:
     1 Place the cursor where you want the link to lead to.

     2 Click the    Insert/Edit Anchor icon.
     3 On the Anchor Properties form, enter the anchor name.




                                     Figure 29: Inserting an Anchor
Populating Site with Content     51


4 Click OK.
   The anchor icon      appears in the selected place in the text.
5 Select a text fragment which you want to link to the anchor to.

6 Click the      Insert/Edit Link icon.
7 On the Link Info tab, select Anchor in this page from the Link type list.
   Select an anchor from the list.




                        Figure 30: Creating a Link to the Anchor
8 If you wish to specify additional attributes for the anchor, enter them
  on the Advanced tab:
   Id, this attribute assigns a name to the anchor. This name must be unique on the
   page.
   Language Direction, this attribute specifies the base direction of directionally neutral
   text. Direction can be Left-to-right or Right-to-left.
   Access Key, this attribute assigns an access key to an element. An access key is a
   single character from the document character set.
   Name, this attribute names the current link as an anchor, so that it may be the
   destination of another link. The value of this attribute must be a unique anchor
   name within the current page.
   Language Code, this attribute specifies the base language of the anchor's attribute
   values and text content.
   Tab Index, this attribute specifies the position of the current element in the tabbing
   order for the current document. The tabbing order defines the order in which
   elements receive focus when navigated by the user via the keyboard. The tabbing
   order may include elements nested within other elements.
52    Populating Site with Content


        Advisory Title, this attribute offers advisory information about the anchor. The
        information is displayed in the status bar of the browser when the mouse hovers
        over an anchor.
        Advisory Content Type, this attribute gives an advisory hint as to the content type of
        the content available at the link target address. It allows user agents to opt to use a
        fallback mechanism rather than fetch the content if they are advised that they will
        get content in a content type they do not support.
        Stylesheet Classes, this attribute assigns a CSS class name or set of class names to
        the anchor.
        Linked Resource Charset, this attribute specifies the character encoding of the
        resource designated by the link.
        Style, this attribute specifies style information for the current anchor. The information
        should be formatted as follows: Content-Style-Type: text/css.
     9 Click OK.

     To remove a link to the anchor, select the link text and click the Remove Link       icon.

     To remove an anchor itself, select it on the page and click the DELETE key.

Inserting E-Mail Link
     If you want visitors of your site to contact you by e-mail, insert an e-mail link into your
     web page. On a web page, this looks like your e-mail address underlined, and when a
     user clicks it, a mail program on his or her computer opens a "Compose New
     Message" window with your e-mail address specified as the recipient address. When
     placing e-mail links, you can also specify the default subject for the message.

      To insert an e-mail link:
     1 Select a text which you want to set as an e-mail link.

     2 Click the      Insert/Edit Link icon.
     3 On the Link Info tab, select E-mail from the Link type list.
     4 Enter an e-mail address in the E-mail address field.
     5 In the Message subject field, enter the default subject of the message.
     6 In the Message body field, enter the default text of the message.
Populating Site with Content     53




                           Figure 31: Inserting an E-Mail Link
7 If you want to specify additional attributed for the link, you can do it
  on the Advanced tab.
   Id, this attribute assigns a name to the link. This name must be unique on the page.
   Language Direction, this attribute specifies the base direction of directionally neutral
   text. Direction can be Left-to-right or Right-to-left.
   Access Key, this attribute assigns an access key to an element. An access key is a
   single character from the document character set.
   Name, this attribute names the current link as an anchor, so that it may be the
   destination of another link. The value of this attribute must be a unique anchor
   name within the current page.
   Language Code, this attribute specifies the base language of the link's attribute
   values and text content.
   Tab Index, this attribute specifies the position of the current element in the tabbing
   order for the current document. The tabbing order defines the order in which
   elements receive focus when navigated by the user via the keyboard. The tabbing
   order may include elements nested within other elements.
   Advisory Title, this attribute offers advisory information about the link. The
   information is displayed in the status bar of the browser when the mouse hovers
   over the link.
   Advisory Content Type, this attribute gives an advisory hint as to the content type of
   the content available at the link target address. It allows user agents to opt to use a
   fallback mechanism rather than fetch the content if they are advised that they will
   get content in a content type they do not support.
   Stylesheet Classes, this attribute assigns a CSS class name or set of class names to
   the link.
   Linked Resource Charset, this attribute specifies the character encoding of the
   resource designated by the link.
54     Populating Site with Content


          Style, this attribute specifies style information for the current link. The information
          should be formatted as follows: Content-Style-Type: text/css.
     8 Click OK.



Working with Images
     The Plesk Sitebuilder WYSIWYG editor allows you to insert images into the pages of
     your site, and to adjust their properties as desired: resize, crop, set alignment, spacing,
     add borders, specify meta information and configure advanced image settings, such as
     long description and CSS styles.

     You can insert images from your computer, or buy and upload professional images
     from Fotolia (http://www.fotolia.com/parallels/) - the first worldwide social marketplace
     for royalty free stock images. You can browse the Fotolia gallery, purchase and upload
     any image of your choice directly from Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. As a Parallels
     customer, you have a 20% bonus when purchasing Fotolia images.

     In this section:
     Inserting Image ................................................................................................. 55
     Editing Image .................................................................................................... 59
     Removing Image ............................................................................................... 61
Populating Site with Content   55




Inserting Image
    To insert an image:
   1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page.
   2 Place the mouse cursor where you want to insert an image.

   3 Click the     Insert/Edit Image icon.
   4 On the Image Info tab, click Browse Server.




                                 Figure 32: Inserting an Image
   5 Click Browse and select an image to upload.
      Note: The maximum size of the image is 200KB. The supported graphics file
      formats are *.gif, *.jpg, *.jpeg, *.png, *.bmp.
   6 Click Open, then click Upload.
      When inserting an image, only the Image file type is available in the Resource type
      list.
      For each uploaded image, size is shown.
      If you plan to upload many images to the server, you can organize them in a
      number of folders on the file uploading screen. To do so, you need to create the
      desired hierarchy of folders prior to uploading the files. To create a folder in the root
      directory, click Add New Folder in the bottom part of the screen and provide the folder
      name on the pop-up window that appears. Having created a folder, click its name to
      open it. You can create a new folder inside the opened folder, or upload a file to it.
56    Populating Site with Content


        When the folder is opened, the top bar of the file uploading screen shows the path
        to this folder on the server, and the left frame provides navigation to the upper-level
        folder. To navigate one level up, click the .. icon.
        To delete an image, click the corresponding       icon.
     7 To insert an image into the page, click the image file name.




                              Figure 33: Uploading an Image to the Server
        The image appears in the preview area of the Image Properties dialog; the image
        dimensions appear automatically in the corresponding fields. The path to the image
        on the server is placed in the URL field.
     8 Click OK.
     You can also buy and upload professional images from the Fotolia
     (http://www.fotolia.com/parallels/) stock images marketplace.

      To buy an image from the Fotolia gallery and insert it into a page:
     1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page.
     2 Place the mouse cursor where you want to insert an image.

     3 Click the     Insert/Edit Image icon.
     4 On the Image Info tab, click Browse the Fotolia gallery.
     5 Browse the gallery and click on the image of your choice.
        For your convenience, images are arranged in categories and subcategories, by the
        depicted subject (displayed on the Representative Categories tab), or by the idea they
        express (on the Conceptual Categories tab). To view the category of interest, click its
        name on either of the tabs. At the top of the page you can see the path to the
        category or subcategory in both groups of categories (on both tabs).
Populating Site with Content   57


   You can also search for images by keywords or ID (if you know the ID of the image
   in the Fotolia gallery) using the Search for option at the top of the window.
   When you hover your mouse over an image, detailed information about it is
   displayed, including the image ID, short description, author, the lowest available
   price, and path on both tabs.
   After you click on the image, it is highlighted in red.




                  Figure 34: Selecting an Image in the Fotolia Gallery
6 Click OK.
7 To purchase the image, click the Proceed to buying this image shortcut in
  the upper part of the window.
   Images not purchased from Fotolia are not displayed on the published site.
8 In the License column of the table, select the preferred dimensions and
  resolution option for the image.
   For each license, price in credits is displayed (1 credit = $1.00).
9 Click Next.
10 If you do not have a Fotolia account yet, click Register Now and
   complete the registration procedure on the Fotolia web site.
   After activating your account on the Fotolia web site, you can buy a number of
   credits right away. You can pay for credits via your credit card, PayPal or Click &
   Buy. Having registered an account and bought some credits, return to Plesk
   Sitebuilder to purchase the desired image.
11 On the login and registration window, input your account credentials
   and click Log In.
   In the User info section, you see the number of credits you have on your account.
   In the Image info section, you see the image preview, details and price.
58    Populating Site with Content


        If you do not have enough credits for buying the image, click the Buy more credits
        shortcut and purchase credits on the Fotolia web site, or click Back to return to the
        previous screen and choose a cheaper license.
     12 Click Purchase Now.
     13 On the confirmation screen, click Close.
Populating Site with Content   59




Editing Image
    To edit image size, alignment, spacing, border, alternate text, target URL, or advanced
     settings:
   1 Right-click on the image.
   2 Choose Image Properties from the context menu.
   3 To provide an alternate text for the image, enter it in the Alternate text
     field.
      This text replaces the image in conditions when it cannot be rendered normally -
      when users' browsers are configured not to display images, or when the page is
      visited by visually impaired users (the ones who use speech synthesizers).
      Specifying this attribute is considered a requirement for most web resources. In
      some browsers (for example, in Internet Explorer) the alternate text is displayed
      when the mouse hovers over an image.
   4 To resize the image, specify the image dimensions in the Width and
     Height fields.
      To reset the image size to its original one, click the Reset Size    icon.
      When resizing an image, you can choose whether to keep the proportions of the
      original image or change the image width and height separately. To do so, use the
      Lock aspect ratio icon.
      The Preview window shows the image appearance after the resize.
   5 To draw a border around the image, specify a desired border width in
     pixels in the Border width field.
      To set the color of the border, go to the Advanced tab and enter the color in the Style
      field, in CSS style format (for example, color: black).
   6 To set the width of white space to be inserted to the left and right of
     the image, specify a desired value in pixels in the Horizontal spacing
     field.
   7 To set the width of white space to be inserted above and below the
     image, specify a desired value in pixels in the Vertical spacing field.
   8 To align the image on the page and set the desired word wrap type,
     choose the appropriate option from the Align list.
   9 On the Link tab, in the URL field, specify the link where the image will
     point.
      To point an image to a file on your computer, click Browse Server and upload a file as
      described in Inserting External Link (on page 47).
   10 From the Target list, choose the way the link should open:
         To open the link in same browser window, leave the Target option in its default
          value <not set>.
         To open the link in the new browser window, select New window [_blank] from the
          Target list.
60    Populating Site with Content


             Note: Other options in the Target list have been designed to work with the HTML
                Frames technology, which is currently not used on Plesk Sitebuilder sites.
                On non-frames sites, all these options open the link in the same window.
     11 If you wish to specify additional attributes for the image, enter them
        on the Advanced tab:
        ID, this attribute assigns a name to the object element, which can be used, for
        example, as a target anchor for a hyperlink. This ID must be unique on the page.
        Text Direction, specifies the base direction of directionally neutral text. Direction can
        be Left to right or Right to left.
        Language Code, this attribute specifies the ISO code of the natural language in which
        the image meta information is provided. This improves your image rendering by
        search engines and helps visually impaired users. You can provide the language
        code in the following formats:
           As an ISO 639 two-letter abbreviation (en (English), fr (French), de (German), it
            (Italian)); the full list of such abbreviations is available here
            (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes).
           As a combination of the ISO 639 language code and a two-letter ISO 3166
            country code (for example, en-US). The full list of ISO 3166 two-letter codes can
            be found here (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_3166-1).
        Long Description URL, this attribute specifies a link to the image long description,
        which opens upon clicking on the alternate text.
        Stylesheet Classes, this attribute assigns a CSS class name or set of class names to
        the image.
        Advisory Title, this attribute offers advisory information about the image. The
        information is displayed on a tool tip which appears when the mouse hovers over
        the image. If you leave this field blank, in Internet Explorer, the tool tip contains the
        image alternate text. In Mozilla Firefox, the tool tip is not displayed.
        Style, this attribute specifies style information for the current image. The information
        should be formatted as follows: Content-Style-Type: text/css.
     12 Click OK.
      To crop an image:

     1 Click on the image and then click                Crop on the WYSIWYG editor
       toolbar.
        Or, right-click on the image and choose Crop Image from the context menu.
     2 In the crop window, with your mouse, drag the borders of the crop
       area where desired using the resize handles at the sides.
Populating Site with Content   61




                             Figure 35: Cropping the Image
   To move the crop area use the move handle which appears when you hover your
   mouse over the crop area.
   When your are setting the crop area using the mouse cursor, you can see the size
   of the resulting image and the size of the cropped areas on the left of the window.
   You can adjust the sizes by specifying certain number of pixels in the
   corresponding fields:
      To set the width of the area to be cropped from the left or right of the image,
       specify a desired number of pixels in the Left crop band size field. To crop from
       the right, specify a negative number.
      To set the width of the area to be cropped from the top or bottom of the image,
       specify a desired number of pixels in the Top crop band size field. To crop from
       the bottom, specify a negative number.
   To adjust the dimensions of the resulting image, specify the desired width and
   height in the Output image width and Output image height fields.
3 If you wish to keep the original image proportions after cropping,
  select the Lock aspect ratio check box.
4 Click OK.
Note: The resize and crop operations are applied to the copy of the image. If you wish
to restore the original image, reload it from the server (right-click on the cropped image
> Image Properties > Browse Server > click the corresponding image file > OK).
62       Populating Site with Content




Removing Image
     To remove an image from the page, click on it and then press DELETE on your
     keyboard.



Working with Tables
     Tables are used to organize textual and numerical information in a convenient and
     clear way. Besides, on web pages, tables are often used as a convenient tool for
     building page layout. When you build your page on the basis of a table, you:
          Have more freedom in positioning elements on a web page
          Ensure that organized text is displayed correctly in all browsers and screen
           resolutions
     With table-based layout you may, for example, incorporate an RSS feed into your page
     as a side frame, by drag-and-dropping the RSS module as described in section Adding
     RSS News Feeds (on page 148), into one of the table columns.

     The current section describes how to work with tables: insert tables, add and delete
     rows, columns, and cells, merge and split cells, and resize tables and cells.

     In this section:
     Inserting Table .................................................................................................. 63
     Editing Table Properties .................................................................................... 64
     Adding or Removing Rows, Columns, and Cells ............................................... 65
     Editing Cell Properties ....................................................................................... 67
     Merging Cells .................................................................................................... 67
     Spanning Cell across Several Rows or Columns ............................................... 68
     Splitting Cell ...................................................................................................... 69
     Adding Content to Table .................................................................................... 69
     Removing Table ................................................................................................ 70
Populating Site with Content   63




Inserting Table
    To insert a table:
   1 Place the cursor where you want to insert a table.
   2 Click the   Insert/Edit Table icon on the WYSIWYG editor toolbar.
   3 Specify the number of columns and rows in the table.
   4 Specify the table width and height.
      In the Width field, enter the desired table width in pixels. The default value is 200 px.
      We do not recommend creating tables wider than 760 pixels, so that your table is
      displayed correctly in all screen resolutions.
      Note: Some site design templates do not allow inserting tables wider than 450 px,
      or even 280 px. In such templates, inserting wider tables causes odd look of the
      page on preview. If inserting a wider table is critical for you, go to the Design step of
      the Wizard and choose a different site design template.
      In the Height field, specify the table height in pixels. If you leave this field blank, the
      value is set automatically based on the number of rows. The default row height is
      20 px.
   5 In Border size field, specify the size of the table border in pixels.
      The default value is 1 px.
      Note: To make the borders invisible, specify "0" in the Border size field. You may
      need this option if you are using a table for page layouting purposes.
   6 Select the alignment type (Left, Center, or Right).
      By default, the table is left aligned.
   7 Specify cell spacing and padding.
         Cell spacing is the distance between the cells. The default value is 1 px.
         Cell padding is the distance between the border of the cell and the text
          contained in the sell. The default value is 1 px.
   8 Optionally, enter the table caption and description (summary).
         The table caption is displayed on the site page above the table (center aligned).
          By default, the caption is given in the same font as all other text information on
          the page.
         The table description (summary) is not shown on the site page - your users will
          see it in a pop-up window after they right-click on the table and choose Properties
          from the context menu. To see how it works, open the site preview. The
          Properties option is displayed only for tables which have a description (summary)
          specified.
   9 Click OK.

   10 Click       Save on the WYSIWYG editor toolbar.
64    Populating Site with Content




                                     Figure 36: Inserting a Table


Editing Table Properties
      To edit the table properties:
     1 Right-click inside the table and choose        Table Properties from the
       context menu.
     2 In the Table Properties dialog , you can set the following properties:
           Width. You can specify the new value in pixels, or as a percent from the original
            width.
           Height. Specify the new value in pixels.
           Cell spacing and Cell padding.
           Alignment.
           Border size.
           Table Caption and Summary.
        For detailed information about setting these parameters, refer to section Inserting
        Table (on page 63).
        Note: You cannot edit the number of rows and columns in this dialog. Learn how to
        change the number of rows and columns in section Adding or Removing Rows,
        Columns and Cells (on page 65).
     3 Click OK.
     Alternatively, you can resize the table horizontally or vertically (edit table width, or
     height, or both) with your mouse. To do so, click one of the table's resize handles and,
     holding down your mouse, drag the border to the location you prefer.
Populating Site with Content      65




                       Figure 37: Resizing a Table with the Mouse Cursor


Adding or Removing Rows, Columns, and Cells
    To add a row or a column:
   1 Place your mouse cursor in one of the table cells.
   2 Right-click on the cell and choose the necessary operation from the
     context menu:
          To insert a row below the current row (containing a cursor), choose           Insert
           Row.
          To insert a column to the right from the current column, choose         Insert Column.
           Note: When you add a row or column to the table, the table is not resized to
              accommodate them. Instead, other columns and rows present in the table
              are resized to fit into the specified table width or height. If you wish to
              preserve the original column and row properties, resize the table prior to
              adding a new column or row. For information on table resizing, refer to
              Editing Table Properties (on page 64).
          To insert a cell to the right from the current cell, choose    Insert Cell.
           The cell is added in the current row, immediately to the right from the highlighted
           cell. Other cells in the row are shifted right.

    To remove a row, column, or cell:
   1 Place your mouse cursor in the cell you wish to delete.
   2 Right-click on the highlighted cell. Depending on the operation you
     wish to perform, select    Delete Rows, Delete Columns, or  Delete Cells
     from the context menu.
       After you delete a column or row, other columns and rows are resized to fill the
       space. After you delete a cell, other cells in the row are shifted left.
   In some web browsers, the table cell containing a cursor will be marked with quick
   operation shortcuts - two small arrows and a circle   . You can use these shortcuts to
   edit your table in the following way:
      To insert a row below the current row, click the downward pointing arrow. When
       you hover your mouse over the arrow, the arrow's color is changed to red .

      To insert a row above, click the upward pointing arrow .
66       Populating Site with Content


          To insert a column to the left, click the arrow pointing left     .
          To insert a column to the right, click the arrow pointing right       .
          To remove the current column, click the circle between the arrows on the top border
           of the highlighted cell .
          To remove the current row, click the same circle on the left border of the highlighted
           cell .
Populating Site with Content   67




Editing Cell Properties
    To configure the parameters of a cell:
   1 Place your mouse cursor in the desired cell.
   2 Right-click on the cell and select     Cell Properties from the context
     menu.
   3 On the Cell Properties tab, you can set the following properties:
         Width/Height. Specify the width (in pixels, or percent from the original one) and
          height (in pixels) of the selected cell.
          Note: A cell is resized together with the row or column containing it.
         The content positioning options:
             Word Wrap. When word wrap is enabled (the default option), a word which
              exceeds the cell width is automatically moved to the next line within the cell.
             Vertical Alignment/Horizontal Alignment. Choose one of the provided options for
              horizontal (Left, Right, or Center) and vertical alignment (Top, Middle, Bottom, or
              Baseline).
              By default, the content is left and top aligned.
         Color options:
             Background Color.
             Border Color.
          To set the color, click Select, choose the desired color from one of the provided
          palettes and click OK.
   4 Click OK.




                                Figure 38: Editing Cell Properties
68       Populating Site with Content




Merging Cells
     Sometimes, you may need to unify several rows or columns with a single horizontal or
     vertical cell containing information common for these cells. To do this, you can either
     span one cell across several rows or columns, or merge several cells into one
     (horizontally or vertically). The difference between these two options is as follows:
          When you merge cells, they are united in a single cell. The content of the cells is
           merged as well.
          When you span a cell across several rows or columns, the cell is stretched, and
           shifts other cells together with their content to the right (when you span a row), or
           downwards (when you span a column).
      To merge cells:
     1 Select the cells you wish to merge.
           To select the cells, left-click your mouse on the first cell you wish to merge and,
           holding down your mouse, drag it over other required cells. Alternatively, you can
           place your mouse cursor in the far right cell to be merged and press SHIFT + <-
           (left arrow) on your keyboard to select other required cells. The selected cells are
           highlighted in color.
     2 Right-click on the table and choose                 Merge Cells.
     For details on spanning cells, refer to section Spanning Cell across Several Rows or
     Columns (on page 68).


Spanning Cell across Several Rows or Columns
     Sometimes, you may need to unify several rows or columns by a single horizontal or
     vertical cell containing information common for these cells. To do this, you can either
     span a cell across several rows or columns, or merge several cells into one
     (horizontally or vertically).

     The difference between these two options is as follows:
          When you merge cells, they are just united in a single cell. The content of the cells
           is merged as well.
          When you span a cell across several rows or columns, the cell is stretched, and
           shifts other cells, together with their content, to the right (when you span a row), or
           downwards (when you span a column).
      To span a cell across several rows or columns:
     1 Place your mouse cursor in the desired cell.
     2 Right-click on the table and select  Cell Properties from the context
       menu.
     3 On the Cell Properties tab:
              To span a cell across several rows, specify the number of rows in the Rows Span
               field.
Populating Site with Content   69


          To span a cell across several columns, specify the number of columns in the
           Columns Span field.




                 Figure 39: Spanning a Cell across Several Rows or Columns

   For details on cells merging, refer to section Merging Cells (on page 67).


Splitting Cell
    To split a cell (horizontally):
   1 Place your mouse cursor in the cell you wish to split.
   2 Right-click on the table and choose   Split Cell from the context menu.
    Later you can adjust the width of the new cells according to the instructions provided in
   section Editing Cell Properties (on page 67).


Adding Content to Table
   Tables are often used for building web page layouts. When building your page on the
   basis of a table, you:
      Have more freedom in positioning elements on a web page
      Ensure that organized text is displayed correctly in all browsers and screen
       resolutions

   Note: If you wish to use tables for organizing your content, set the table Border Width
   parameter to 0. For details on setting table parameters, refer to Inserting Table (on page
   63).

   Plesk Sitebuilder allows you to add all types of content to tables, including text, images,
   and block modules.

    To insert text in a table:
   1 Place your mouse cursor in the desired table cell.
70       Populating Site with Content


     2 Enter your text.
           You can either
               Type in your text (see Working with Text (on page 41) for instructions on
                performing various formatting and other operations with the text)
           or

               Paste it from the clipboard by right-clicking on the cell and choosing      Paste
                from the content menu, or by using the keyboard shortcut (CTRL+V)
           The table cell is resized to accommodate the text. If necessary, you can enable or
           disable the word wrap function; you can also set the text alignment in the cell. Refer
           to Editing Cell Properties (on page 67) for details on both these operations.

      To insert an image in a table:
     1 Place your mouse cursor in the desired table cell.
     2 Insert the image as described in section Inserting Image (see page 55).
           The table cell is resized to accommodate the image.
     To insert a block module, click on the desired block module in the Modules section of
     the Edit page and, keeping down your mouse, drag it to the required table cell. For
     information on further modules setup, refer to Working with Modules (on page 70).


Removing Table
     To remove a table from the page, right-click it and select Delete Table from the context
     menu.



Working with Modules
     There are two types of modules you can configure in Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard:
          Page modules, or special pages. These modules are added to your site as
           separate web pages on the Pages step of the Wizard. There are the following
           special pages in Plesk Sitebuilder:
                  Blog (see page 73)
                  Image Gallery (see page 80)
                  eShop (see page 88)
                  File Download (see page 118)
                  Flash Intro (see page 119)
                  Forum (see page 120)
                  Guestbook (see page 128)
                  Registration (see page 132)
                  External Page (see page 138)
Populating Site with Content   71


    All page modules available in Plesk Sitebuilder are described in section Types of
    Pages (on page 31). For instructions on how to include special pages in your site
    structure, see section Structuring Your Site (on page 32).
   Block modules. These modules do not require dedicated site pages: they are
    inserted into ordinary HTML pages, and work as embedded functional blocks.
    There are the following block modules in Plesk Sitebuilder:
         Area Map (see page 138). Allows you to insert fragments of geographical
        maps into site pages. You can choose between two third-party GIS engines:
        Google Maps API and Microsoft MapPoint Web Service.
         Feedback (see page 143). Allows you to include a feedback form into the
        page.
         RSS Reader (see page 148). Allows you to automatically load favorite news
        and information to you site from RSS news feeds (also called "channels").
         Script (see page 150). Allows you to add custom PHP, Perl/CGI, JavaScript,
        DHTML or any other code to your web pages.
          Voting (see page 152). Allows conducting polls and online surveys.
          Online Status Indicator (see page 154). Allows you to place an icon showing
        your ICQ or Skype status on your site.

           SitePal (see page 155). Allows adding SitePal speaking animated characters
        to your site.
           Site Map (see page 159). Allows displaying a hierarchical visual model of the
        site structure to visitors.
Block modules are added and configured on the Edit step of the Wizard.

General rules for working with block modules are the following:
   You can add any number of block modules to a page.
   To insert a block module into the page, select the module icon in the Modules area
    on the right, click and drag it to the desired location on the page.
    To insert a block module in the beginning of the page, double click the module title
    in the Modules area.
   Block modules cannot be viewed directly on the Edit step. You can only configure
    block modules there. To preview block modules as they are displayed on your site,
    click Preview.
   To delete a block module from the page, click      Remove Module on the block
    module dialog box.
For details on configuring each particular module, see the corresponding sections
further in this guide.

For information on how to operate with lists of objects appearing on module
management screens, refer to section Working with Lists (on page 14).
72     Populating Site with Content



     In this section:
     Adding Blog ....................................................................................................... 73
     Adding Image Gallery ........................................................................................ 80
     Adding Online Store .......................................................................................... 88
     Providing Content for Download ........................................................................ 118
     Adding Flash Intro ............................................................................................. 119
     Adding Forum.................................................................................................... 120
     Adding Guestbook ............................................................................................. 128
     Providing Registration to Your Site Visitors ....................................................... 132
     Incorporating Link to External Page into Your Site Menu ................................... 138
     Adding Maps ..................................................................................................... 138
     Adding Feedback Form ..................................................................................... 143
     Adding RSS News Feeds .................................................................................. 148
     Inserting Scripts into Your Web Pages .............................................................. 150
     Conducting Polls and Online Surveys................................................................ 152
     Adding Online Status Indicator .......................................................................... 154
     Adding SitePal Animated Character .................................................................. 155
     Adding Site Map ................................................................................................ 159
Populating Site with Content       73




Adding Blog
   A blog is a publicly accessible personal diary or journal consisting of messages (posts)
   and visitors' comments. You can add a blog to your site and post your messages there.
   The visitors of your site can read your blog posts and leave their comments. If you
   have lots of posts in you blog, you can subdivide them into categories for convenience.

    To add a blog to your site:
   1 Go to the Pages step.
   2 Select            Blog in the Special pages box.
   3 Click                     .
   You can add several blogs to your site.

    To proceed to setting up your blog:
   1 Go to the Edit step.
   2 Select            Blog in the Site map area.




                                              Figure 40: Blog Editor

   In this section:
   Managing Posts in Your Blog ............................................................................ 74
   Managing Comments to Blog Posts .................................................................. 76
   Managing Categories of Blog Posts .................................................................. 77
   Setting Up Blog Appearance ............................................................................. 79
74    Populating Site with Content



Managing Posts in Your Blog
     After you add a blog to your site, the next step is to fill it in with posts. The procedures
     of adding and managing your blog posts are described in the current section.

     By default, the module contains two default blog posts, which you can remove (see
     page 75) or edit as desired (see page 75).


Posting to Your Blog

      To add a blog post:
     1 On the          Blog page, go to the Content tab.
     2 Click Add New Post.
     3 Enter a post subject in the Subject field.
     4 Enter the post text in the Content field.
        If you wish to hide a part of your post under a cut, input it below the %placeToCut
        tag.

     5 If you want to add an image to the post, click the          Insert/Edit Image
       icon, navigate to the image file, click Send it to the Server and then click
       OK.
        Optionally, in the Alternative Text field, and type the text to be displayed when a user
        hovers the cursor over the image.
     6 Click OK.
     By default, the blog contains two default categories. After you add some new categories
     (see page 77), or edit the existing ones (see page 78), you can refer the created post to
     the desired category, or to several categories.
Populating Site with Content   75




                                Figure 41: Posting to Your Blog


Editing Post

     To edit an existing blog post:
    1 On the       Blog page, go to the Content tab.
    2 Click the        Edit icon beside the post you want to edit.
    3 Edit the post as desired.
    4 Click OK.

Removing Post

     To remove a post from the blog:
    1 On the    Blog page, go to the Content tab.
    2 Select the post you want to remove.
    3 Click       Remove Selected.
76       Populating Site with Content



Managing Comments to Blog Posts
     All your posted entries can be commented by your site visitors. You can edit and
     manage these comments, and add your own ones. The procedures of adding and
     managing your blog comments are described in the current section.

     Note: To prevent automated computer generated spam comments, anonymous users
     will be required to enter a confirmation code to be able to comment on your blog.


Adding Comment

      To add a comment:
     1 On the     Blog page, go to the Content tab.
     2 Click View/Edit Comments beside the corresponding post.
     3 Click           Add New Comment.
     4     Enter a comment subject in the Subject field.
     5     Enter your name in the Posted by field.
     6     Enter the text of the comment in the Content field.
     7     Click OK.
     To return to the list of posts, click     Back to Posts.




                                 Figure 42: Adding a Comment to a Blog Post


Editing Comment
     As a blog owner, you can edit both your own and your blog visitors' comments.
Populating Site with Content   77



     To edit a comment:
    1 On the     Blog page, go to the Content tab.
    2 Click View/Edit Comments beside the corresponding post.

    3 Click the   Edit icon beside the comment you want to edit.
    4 Edit the comment as desired.
    5 Click OK.
    To return to the list of posts, click   Back to Posts.


Removing Comment

     To remove a comment:
    1 On the     Blog page, go to the Content tab.
    2 Click View/Edit Comments beside the corresponding post.
    3 Select the comment you want to remove.
    4 Click        Remove Selected.
    To return to the list of posts, click   Back to Posts.

Managing Categories of Blog Posts
    After you add some messages to your blog, you can group them by the discussed
    subject. In Plesk Sitebuilder, these subjects are referred to as categories. See the
    following sections to learn how to create and manage categories.

    Sitebuilder offers two default blog post categories, which you can remove (see page 79)
    or edit as desired (see page 78).


Adding Category

     To add a category:
    1 On the         Blog page, click the Categories tab.
    2 Click    Add New Category.
    3 On the Main Properties tab, enter a name for the new category in the
      Name field.
    4 If you want to provide a short description for the category, enter it on
      the Description tab.
    5 Click OK.
78    Populating Site with Content




                              Figure 43: Adding a Category for Blog Posts


Editing Category

      To edit a category:
     1 On the          Blog page, click the Categories tab.

     2 Click the    Edit icon beside the category you want to edit.
     3 Edit the category properties as desired.
     4 Click OK.
Populating Site with Content   79




Changing Order of Categories
    You can change the order of categories as they appear in your blog by moving
    particular categories up and down in the list.

     To move a category up or down in the list:
    1 On the        Blog page, click the Categories tab.

    2 Click an upward           or a downward          arrow against the category
      name.
       One click on the icon moves the category one position up or down respectively.
       For categories which have reached the topmost or the bottom position of the list,
       the upward      or downward       arrows are not displayed, correspondingly.

Removing Category

     To remove a category:
    1 On the        Blog page, click the Categories tab.
    2 Select a category you want to remove.
    3 Click      Remove Selected.
       Note: After a category is removed, all posts which have been assigned to it remain
       in the blog.

Setting Up Blog Appearance
     To set up the appearance of your blog:
    1 On the      Blog page, click the Settings tab.
    2 Enter the maximum number of posts on one blog page in the Posts per
      page field.
    3 Enter the maximum number of comments to be displayed on one post
      page in the Comments per page field.
    To preview your blog page appearance, click Preview at the bottom of the Plesk
    Sitebuilder window and go to the blog page of your web site.




                           Figure 44: Setting Up Blog Appearance
80     Populating Site with Content




Adding Image Gallery
     The Image Gallery module allows you to place an image gallery or a series of photo
     albums on your site in an easy and comfortable way. You can upload images, describe
     and categorize them, set the order of images, etc.

      To add an image gallery to your site:
     1 Go to the Pages step.
     2 Select             Image Gallery in the Special pages box.

     3 Click                       .
     You can add several image galleries to your site.

      To proceed to setting up your image gallery:
     1 Go to the Edit step.
     2 Select             Image Gallery in the Site map.




                                           Figure 45: Image Gallery Editor

     In this section:
     Managing Images .............................................................................................. 81
     Managing Categories of Images ........................................................................ 85
     Setting Up Image Gallery Appearance .............................................................. 87
Populating Site with Content   81



Managing Images
    After you add an image gallery to your site, the next step is to fill it in with images. The
    procedures of managing images are described in the current section.


Uploading Images
    Plesk Sitebuilder Image Gallery supports images in *.jpg, *.gif, and *.png formats. To
    ensure correct operation of the module, we do not recommend uploading images of
    more than 3 MB in size.

     To upload several images:
    1 On the    Image Gallery page, click Image Upload on the Images tab.
    2 Locate the images you wish to upload in the provided Image file fields.
       To locate an image, click the corresponding Browse button, navigate to the image
       file in your file system, and click Open.
    3 Provide titles for the images in the corresponding Name fields.
       By default, images are saved under the same names under which they are stored
       on your computer. If you wish to save them under different names, clear the check
       box Use the file name as default image name and specify the names you prefer.
    4 To set the size of images as they appear in your gallery, select one of
      the options from the Resize images box.
       The available options are:
          1152x864
          1024x768
          800x600
          640x480
          480x360
          360x270
          Do not resize
       By default the 1024x768 image resize option is used.
    5 Click OK.
    You can view the list of images on the Images tab.

    By default, the gallery contains two default categories. After you add some new categories
    (see page 85), or edit the existing ones (see page 86), you can refer the image to a
    desired category, or to several categories.
82    Populating Site with Content




                                     Figure 46: Uploading Images

     Plesk Sitebuilder provides a possibility of batch image upload, allowing to publish many
     images at once. You can upload the images from your local file system, and perform a
     group resize operation on them. The maximum size of the batch is determined by the
     disk space on the publishing server and by the parameters of the network.

      To upload multiple images:
     1 Arrange the images you want to upload in one folder on your
       computer.
     2 On the      Image Gallery page, click    Multiple Image Upload on the Images
       tab.
     3 In the left frame of the Multiple Image Upload window, navigate to the
       required folder in your file system.
     4 Select the images you want to upload in the work area of the screen.
        When selecting images, follow these guidelines:
           To select or deselect an image, click it.
           To select all images in the folder, click Select All.
           To deselect all images, click Deselect All.
     5 From the Upload to category list, select a category to refer images to:
           If you have already created a category for your images, select the required
            category from the list.
           If you want to create a new category for the images, select Create new category
            and type the category name in the field that appears.
           If you do not want to refer images to any category, select No category.
     6 From the Resize images list, select the desired resizing option.
        The available options are:
           1024x768 px
Populating Site with Content   83


          800x600 px
          640x480 px
          Do not resize.
    7 Click Upload.
    8 After the upload is complete, click OK on the progress bar and on the
      screen.




                             Figure 47: Uploading Multiple Images

    You have an option of adding professional images from a worldwide stock images
    marketplace, Fotolia (http://www.fotolia.com/parallels/), to your gallery. Click Buy
    Pictures to proceed to the Fotolia web site, where you can browse the Fotolia gallery
    and buy images. As a Parallels customer, you have a 20% bonus when purchasing
    Fotolia images.


Previewing Images

     To preview an image:
    1 On the        Image Gallery page, go to the Images tab.
    2 Click the       Preview icon against the image you want to preview.
    The image opens in a new window.
84    Populating Site with Content




Editing Image Properties

      To edit an image:
     1 On the          Image Gallery page, go to the Images tab.
     2 Click the    Edit icon against the image you want to edit.
     3 Configure the image parameters as desired.
     4 Click OK.

Removing Images

      To remove an image:
     1 On the          Image Gallery page, go to the Images tab.
     2 Select the image you want to remove.
     3 Click         Remove Selected.
Populating Site with Content   85



Managing Categories of Images
    You can organize your images in photo albums, by arranging them in categories. One
    image may belong to one or several categories at the same time. Splitting images into
    categories is especially convenient when you have a large number of images. See the
    following sections to learn how to create and manage categories.

    Plesk Sitebuilder offers two default categories, which you can remove (see page 87) or
    edit as desired (see page 86).


Adding Category

     To add a category:
    1 On the       Image Gallery page, click the Categories tab.
    2 Click      Add New Category.
    3 On the Main Properties tab, enter a name for the new category in the
      Name field.
    4 If you want to upload an image to be displayed beside the category
      name, click Browse, select an image file on your computer and click
      Open, then click Upload.
       The maximum image size is 100x100 px; larger or smaller images will be resized
       accordingly.
       The uploaded image is displayed in the Current image area.
    5 If you want to provide a short description for the category, enter it on
      the Description tab.
       Site visitors see this description beside the category name.
    6 Click OK.




                           Figure 48: Adding a Category for Images
86    Populating Site with Content




Editing Category

      To edit a category:
     1 On the          Image Gallery page, click the Categories tab.
     2 Click the    Edit icon beside the category you want to edit.
     3 Configure the category parameters as desired.
     4 Click OK.
Populating Site with Content   87




Changing Order of Categories
    You can change the order in which categories appear in your gallery by moving
    particular categories up and down the list.

     To move a category up or down in the list:
    1 On the        Image Gallery page, click the Categories tab.

    2 Click an upward            or a downward          arrow against the category
      name.
       One click on the icon moves the category one position up or down respectively.
       For categories which have reached the topmost or the bottom position of the list,
       the upward       or downward        arrows are not displayed, correspondingly.

Removing Category

     To remove a category:
    1 On the        Image Gallery page, click the Categories tab.
    2 Select the category you want to remove.
    3 Click       Remove Selected.
       Note: After a category is removed, all images which have been assigned to it
       remain in the gallery.

Setting Up Image Gallery Appearance
     To set up image gallery appearance:
    1 On the        Image Gallery page, click the Settings tab.
    2 Configure the following settings:
          Category image width (px) - the width of the category image. When you set smaller
           width than the original one, the picture height is resized accordingly to keep the
           width-height ratio. You cannot set larger image width than the original one.
          Image thumb width (px) - the width of the image thumbnail.
          Image thumb height (px) - the height of the image thumbnail.
          Preview width (px) - the width of the image preview (opened by clicking on the
           image thumbnail). When you set smaller width than the original one, the picture
           height is resized accordingly to keep the width-height ratio. You cannot set
           larger image width than the original one.
          Images per page - the number of images to be displayed per page.
    To preview your image gallery, click Preview at the bottom of the Plesk Sitebuilder
    window and go to the image gallery page of your web site.
88    Populating Site with Content




                           Figure 49: Setting Up Image Gallery Appearance


Adding Online Store
     In Plesk Sitebuilder you can set up your own online store by adding the eShop module
     into your site.

     You, as the online store owner, can offer your customers a feature-rich product catalog,
     accept online payments from buyers, and manage orders submitted by them. You can
     integrate your e-commerce resource with various payment gateways, so that
     customers can pay for their purchases using their credit cards.

      To add an online store to your site:
     1 Go to the Pages step.
     2 Select         eShop in the Special pages box.

     3 Click                 .
     You can set up several online stores on your site by adding as many eShop page
     modules to your site structure as necessary. Currency, payment settings, lists of
     categories and products you create in different eShop modules are independent of
     each other.

      To proceed to setting up your online store:
     1 Go to the Edit step.
     2 Click        eShop in the Site map area.
Populating Site with Content         89




                                          Figure 50: Online Store Editor

   In this section:
   Managing Products ........................................................................................... 89
   Arranging Products in Categories ...................................................................... 95
   Setting Up Catalog Appearance ........................................................................ 98
   Configuring Payment Settings for Your Online Store ......................................... 99
   Specifying Terms of Service for Your Customers .............................................. 105
   Previewing Your Catalog ................................................................................... 106
   Setting Up Customer Order Notification............................................................. 110
   Making Your Catalog Searchable by Google ..................................................... 111
   Supplying Your Product Catalog as RSS Feed.................................................. 115
   Managing Customers' Orders ............................................................................ 117


Managing Products
   After you add the eShop module to your site, the next step is to populate it with
   products. The procedures of adding and managing products are described in the
   current section.

   In this section:
   Adding Product to Catalog................................................................................. 90
   Editing Product Properties ................................................................................. 94
   Removing Product ............................................................................................. 94
90    Populating Site with Content




Adding Product to Catalog
     On the Products tab you will find two default products, which you can edit as desired (see
     page 94), or remove (see page 94) from your catalog.

      To add a new product:
     1 On the          eShop page, go to the Products tab.
     2 Click        Add New Product.
     3 Enter the name under which the product is displayed in the catalog in
       the Name field.
     4 Enter the product price in the Price field (it will be displayed to site
       visitors in the currency and format you select on the Payment Systems
       tab).
     5 If you want to control the flow of goods as you ship them to customers
       and refill the stock, enter the quantity of this product on stock in the
       Stock level field.
        (By default, stock level tracking is enabled in your eShop. If you do not wish to use
        this feature, you can disable it in your online store settings (eShop > Settings tab >
        Enable stock level tracking check box). Product stock quantity remains visible on the
        Products tab of your online store settings, but the quantity is not recalculated after
        you change the order status.)
        The stock level calculation is performed according to the following rules:
           When your customer buys a certain quantity of products in your online store, the
            fact of the purchase does not affect the product quantity record. Only after you,
            as the online store owner, manually change the customer's order status to
            Processed or Completed, the quantity of items in the order is subtracted from the
            stock quantity record.
           If later you change either of these two statuses to any other order statuses in
            Plesk Sitebuilder (Backorder, Failed, Cancelled, etc.), the order quantity is added
            back to the quantity record.
        Stock level is not shown to your online store customers: it is intended for your
        internal use only, so even if the quantity of the product turns to "0" (zero), your
        customers will still be able to buy the product in any quantity they choose.
     6 If you do not wish to sell the product, just to display informati on about
       it, select the Advertise only check box.
        Your e-shop buyers won't be able to add this product to their carts.
     7 If you want to upload an image of the product, click Browse, navigate
       to the image file and click Upload.
        You can open the full-size preview of this image by clicking on it. Later you can
        view this image by clicking the corresponding     icon on the Products tab.
        In your online store catalog, the image is shown as a thumbnail on the following
        pages:
           Beside the product name and description on the catalog page
Populating Site with Content   91


      On the product page
   The full-size image is opened upon clicking the thumbnail.
8 If you want to add a short description of the product, enter it in the
  Brief description text box.
   The brief product description is displayed on the main catalog page, or on the page
   of the category the product belongs to.
9 If you want to accompany your product with a detailed description,
  enter it in the Full description text box.
   The full product description is displayed on the product details page.




                        Figure 51: Adding a Product to Catalog
10 If you wish to specify several color options for the product, go to the
   Colors tab and click Add New Color.
      In the Color name field, specify a name that will be easy for you to associate with
       this color.
92    Populating Site with Content



           Click the  icon and choose a desired color from the palette. The color HEX
            code automatically appears in the Color value field.
           If you wish to upload a separate image illustrating the specified color
            modification of the product, click Browse, navigate to the image file and click
            Upload. The thumbnail is shown on the product page after a visitor clicks on the
            corresponding color icon.
             Note: If later you wish to remove the color modification image, click the Reset to
                default image shortcut for the corresponding color on the Colors tab. In the
                catalog, the main product image (the one from the Main Properties tab) is
                shown for this color modification.

           To set the order in which color options are displayed, use the upward        and
            downward           arrows.
           To remove a color option, click      against the corresponding option.
            Available color options are shown both on the main catalog page and on the
            product page.




                             Figure 52: Adding Color Options for a Product
     11 If you wish to specify other product options (such as size,
        manufacturer, etc.), go to the Options tab, select the option type from
        the drop-down list (Apparel size, Shoe size (US, UK, EU), or Custom option),
        and click Add New Option.
Populating Site with Content   93


      For regular product options (Apparel size, Shoe size (US, UK, EU), Plesk Sitebuilder
       suggests default size values.
       Note: In the Name in RSS feed field, Plesk Sitebuilder automatically inputs a
          Google Base RSS 2.0 attribute. This attribute may be useful if later you wish
          to upload your catalog to the Google Base service (see page 111), to ensure your
          products rank higher in main Google searches.
       If you wish to provide your product catalog as an RSS feed (see page 115), you can
           input any XML tag which is understandable by the RSS reader used by the
           party you supply the feed to.
      For custom options, specify a name for the option in the Name in catalog field and
       enter modifications in the Values field (separated by comma or semicolon). If
       necessary, specify a Google Base attribute (see Appendix (on page 170)), or any
       XML tag in the Name in RSS field.

      To set the order in which options are displayed, use the upward           and
       downward        arrows.
      To remove an option, click      against the corresponding option.




                           Figure 53: Adding Product Options
12 If you wish to refer a product to a category (or categories), go to the
   Categories tab and select the appropriate categories.
   By default, the module contains two default categories. After you add some categories
   (see page 95) of your own, or edit the existing ones (see page 97), you can refer the
   created product to a desired category, or to several categories.
94    Populating Site with Content


     13 Click OK.

Editing Product Properties

      To edit the properties of a product:
     1 On the          eShop page, go to the Products tab.
     2 Click the    Edit icon for the product you want to edit.
     3 Edit the product properties as described in Adding Product to Catalog (on
       page 90).
     4 Click OK.

Removing Product

      To remove a product from your online store:
     1 On the          eShop page, go to the Products tab.
     2 Select the product you want to remove.
     3 Click         Remove Selected.
Populating Site with Content   95



Arranging Products in Categories
    After you add a number of products to your e-shop, you may need to arrange them in
    categories, so that your customers could easily navigate in your catalog. On the
    Categories tab you will find two default categories, which you can edit as desired (see
    page 97), or remove from your catalog (see page 98).

    For each product in your online store catalog, the following details are displayed to your
    site visitors:
       Category name. By clicking it a visitor proceeds to the category page.
       The number of products contained in the category, in brackets beside the category
        name.
       Category image, if uploaded.
       Category description.
    By clicking the category name, your site visitor gets to the category page on which the
    following information is shown:
       Category description.
       A list of products contained in the category.
    A customer can navigate back to the catalog by clicking the Back to catalog shortcut.

    Read the current section to know how you can configure all these parameters for a
    category.


Adding Category to Catalog

    On the Categories tab you will find two default categories, which you can edit as desired,
    or remove from your catalog.

     To add a product category:
    1 On the        eShop page, click the Categories tab.
    2 Click   Add New Category.
    3 Enter a name of the new category in the Name field.
    4 If you want to make this category a subcategory of an earlier created
      category, select one from the Parent category list.
        You can create as many levels of categories hierarchy as you wish.
96    Populating Site with Content




                                     Figure 54: Creating a Subcategory
     5 If you want to add an image that will be displayed beside the category
       name in the catalog, click Browse, locate an image file and click Upload.
        Note: Later you can preview this image on the Categories tab by clicking the
        icon for the product in the P (preview) column. For categories for which no image
        has been uploaded, this icon is not displayed.
     6 If you want to provide a short description for the category, enter it in
       the Category description text box.
     7 Click OK.
     Newly created categories appear in your eShop catalog in the order of their creation.
     For details about changing the order of categories in the catalog, see Changing Order of
     Categories (on page 98).
Populating Site with Content   97




                         Figure 55: Creating a Category for Products


Editing Category

     To edit an existing category
    1 On the       eShop page, click the Categories tab.
    2 Click the       Edit icon for the category you wish to edit.
    3 Edit the category properties as desired.
    4 Click OK.
98       Populating Site with Content




Changing Order of Categories
     You can change the order in which categories appear in your catalog by moving
     particular categories up and down in the list.

      To move a category up or down in the list:
     1 On the             eShop page, click the Categories tab.

     2 Click an upward                   or a downward          arrow against the category
       name.
           One click on the icon moves the category one position up or down respectively.
           For categories occupying the topmost or the bottom position of the list, the upward
                 or downward            arrows are not displayed, correspondingly.

Removing Category

      To remove a category:
     1 On the             eShop page, click the Categories tab.
     2 Select a category you want to remove.
     3 Click            Remove Selected.
     Note: When a category is removed, the products belonging to this category remain in
     the catalog. These products are displayed in the uncategorized list, unless they have
     been assigned to other categories.


Setting Up Catalog Appearance
     The main page of your eShop displays the first page of the product catalog. To preview
     your catalog appearance, click Preview at the bottom of the Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard
     window and go to the online store page of your web site.

     The catalog page is divided into two sections:
          The product categories section
          The uncategorized products list (products are shown one below another, in the
           order of their creation).
      To configure the appearance of your product catalog:
     1 On the             eShop page, go to the Settings tab.
     2 To customize the number of columns displayed in the categories list,
       select the desired value (from 1 to 5) from the field Number of columns in
       the categories list.
           By default, categories are shown in two columns. To show categories one below
           another, like items in the uncategorized product section, set the number of columns
           to "1".
Populating Site with Content          99


   3 To define the number of products to be displayed on one page, select
     a desired value (from 5 to 55) from the Number of products per page list.
       These settings apply to all product lists - to the list of uncategorized products shown
       on the front page of your online store, and to the list of products contained in each
       category. By default, 10 products per page are shown. You can set the number of
       products per page to 5, 15, 20, 25 and so on, up to 55.
   4 To customize the order of sections on the catalog page, select either
     of the two options:
           Show categories first (selected by default)
       OR
           Show uncategorized products first
   5 If you wish to change the order of categories in your catalog, go the
       Categories tab and set the desired order using the upward                                        or
       downward               arrows.




                                Figure 56: Setting Up Catalog Appearance

Configuring Payment Settings for Your Online Store
   You can configure the following payment settings for your online store:
      Currency and price format
      Payment systems and shipping methods

       In this section:
       Setting Currency and Price Format ....................................................................100
       Configuring Payment Methods ...........................................................................101
       Adding Shipping Costs.......................................................................................104
100    Populating Site with Content




Setting Currency and Price Format

       To set currency and price format for your store:
      1 On the          eShop page, go to the Payment Systems tab.
         By default, the currency and price format of your online store are the same as for
         the whole site (set on the Pages step, in the Site regional and language options area).
      2 If you wish to change the currency and price format, click Change
        Currency Settings.
      3 Select a desired currency from the Currency list.
         Note: When selecting currency, make sure it is supported by all payment gateways
         you wish to integrate with your online store.
      4 If the currency symbol should go before the numeric value, enter it
        into the Symbol on the left field.
      5 If the currency symbol should go after the numeric value, enter it into
        the Symbol on the right field.
      6 Enter the decimal point (period or comma) to be used with prices into
        the Decimal point field.
Populating Site with Content   101




Configuring Payment Methods
    In Plesk Sitebuilder, you can offer your customers the following payment options:
       Offline payment options:
           Cash on delivery. Payment is made, when a product is delivered to a customer.
           Check / Money order. A customer issues a check or a money order that will be
            sent to you by regular mail.
       Online payment options:
           PayPal
           Authorize.Net
           WorldPay
           BluePay
           2Checkout.com
    This is the default list of available payment systems. Plesk Sitebuilder administrator
    can disable some of the payment systems and integrate a custom payment system to
    the eShop module.

    To see the list of payment methods available to you, as the store owner, go to the
    Payment Systems tab on the eShop page of your Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard.

    Using online payment options allows your online store buyers to pay using their credit
    cards. When a buyer selects an online payment system, he or she is asked to fill in the
    relevant payment details on the Checkout form. After the order is submitted, the
    transaction is processed by the payment gateway, and returned with a certain status
    (successful or unsuccessful), which automatically changes the order status in Plesk
    Sitebuilder to Paid, or Failed, correspondingly.

    Note: For offline payment options, you need to change the order status manually.

    To be able to use the online payment options on your site, you need to integrate these
    payment system gateways with your online store. In Plesk Sitebuilder, you do not need
    any programming or third party scripts to do this - you only need to register merchant
    accounts with the preferred payment systems and fill in your merchant account data in
    the appropriate fields in Plesk Sitebuilder.

    At any moment later you can disable any of the payment methods you configure for
    your customers. When a payment method is disabled, it disappears from the shopping
    cart settings, with all integration settings remaining in the system in read-only format
    (grayed out). By default, all payment options, expect for Cash on delivery, are disabled.

    Note: 1. Before registering with the provided online payment systems, refer to their
    web sites and make sure that the currency you chose for your online store is
    supported.

    2. Requests to all online payment systems are executed only on published sites.
102    Populating Site with Content



Configuring Check/Money Order Payment Method

       To customize check/money order settings:
      1 On the     eShop page, click the Payment Systems tab.
      2 To enable this payment option in your visitors' shopping carts, select
        the check box beside its name.
      3 In the Make payable to field, enter the name of the person to whom funds
        will be sent.
      4 In the Send to address field, enter the postal address where the check or
        order should be sent.
Populating Site with Content   103



Configuring PayPal Integration

      To configure the PayPal payment system for your online store:
     1 On the     eShop page, click the Payment Systems tab.
     2 To enable this payment system in your visitors' shopping carts, select
       the check box beside its name.
     3 In the PayPal account (e-mail) field, enter the e-mail address you use to
       log in to PayPal.
     Note: Requests to PayPal server are executed only on published sites. If you open
     your site in the preview mode, you can see the corresponding window, but the request
     to PayPal server is not executed.


Configuring Authorize.Net Integration

      To integrate Authorize.Net payment system in your online store:
     1 On the       eShop page, click the Payment Systems tab.
     2 To enable this payment system in your visitors' shopping carts, select
       the check box beside its name.
     3 In the Login field, enter the login (user name) you use to log in to
       Authorize.Net.
     4 In the Transaction key field, enter the transaction key used for encrypting
       data.
     Note: Requests to Authorize.Net server are executed only on published sites. If you
     open your site in the preview mode, you can see the corresponding window, but the
     request to Authorize.Net server is not executed.


Configuring WorldPay Integration

      To integrate WorldPay payment system in your online store:
     1 On the       eShop page, click the Payment Systems tab.
     2 To enable this payment system in your visitors' shopping carts, select
       the check box beside its name.
     3 Enter the Installation ID given to you by WorldPay.
     Note: Requests to WorldPay server are executed only on published sites. If you open
     your site in the preview mode, you can see the corresponding window, but the request
     to WorldPay server is not executed.
104    Populating Site with Content



Configuring BluePay Integration

       To configure the BluePay payment system for your online store:
      1 On the     eShop page, click the Payment Systems tab.
      2 To enable this payment system in your visitors' shoppin g carts, select
        the check box beside its name.
      3 In the Merchant ID and Secret Key fields, provide the corresponding data
        which you received from BluePay.
         If you do not have a BluePay merchant account yet, you can get one directly from
         Plesk Sitebuilder. To do so, click the Sign up now shortcut and fill out the opened
         form. After you provide all required data and click OK, a Merchant ID and a Secret
         Key will be generated for you and will be automatically put into the corresponding
         fields on the Payment Systems tab.
         If you do not see the Sign up now shortcut, it means that this option has been
         disabled by your Plesk Sitebuilder provider.

      Note: Requests to BluePay server are executed only on published sites. If you open
      your site in the preview mode, you can see the corresponding window, but the request
      to BluePay server is not executed.


Configuring 2Checkout.com Integration

       To configure the 2Checkout.com payment system for your online store:
      1 On the          eShop page, click the Payment Systems tab.
      2 To enable this payment system in your visitors' shopping carts, select
        the check box beside its name.
      3 In the Vendor account number field, enter the login/user name you use to
        log in to 2Checkout.com.
      4 Click OK.
      Note: Requests to the 2Checkout.com server are executed only on published sites. If
      you open your site in the preview mode, you can see the corresponding window, but
      the request to 2Checkout.com server is not executed.


Adding Shipping Costs

      Plesk Sitebuilder allows you to add a shipping cost to the order total in your online
      store. You can specify a flat rate for each available delivery method or geographical
      area.

      When placing an order in your online store, the customer chooses a shipping method
      on the checkout page (a required option), and the cost associated with the method is
      added to the order total.
Populating Site with Content   105



   If you do not specify any shipping method for your online store, the shipping method
   option does not appear on the checkout page.

    To add a shipping method:
   1 On the        eShop page, click the Shipping Methods tab.
   2 Click   Add New Shipping Method.
   3 On the Main Properties tab:
         Specify the method name in the Shipping method field
         Enter the delivery cost in the Shipping cost field
   4 If you want to provide a short description of the method, enter it on
     the Description tab.
   5 Click OK.




                            Figure 57: Creating a Shipping Method

Specifying Terms of Service for Your Customers
   As the online store owner, you might want to report your terms of service to your
   customers - to clarify rights and responsibilities of both sides. These terms will be
   displayed after a customer clicks the Checkout button, on the order confirmation page.
   Also, you can accompany the text of your terms with a check box requiring customers
   to confirm their accepting of the terms.

    To specify your terms of service:
   1 On the     eShop page, click the Notifications tab.
   2 In the Terms of Service section, in Caption field, type the heading for the
     terms of service. It will be displayed in bigger and bold font above the
     terms text.
   3 In the Text field, specify the text of your terms.
      Until you provide your text in this field, no information you have specified on the
      Terms of Service tab is visible to your customers.
106       Populating Site with Content


      4 If you want your customers to confirm their understanding and
        acceptance of your terms, you can place a check box below the terms
        text. The label text for this check box you specify in the Acceptance
        check box label field. For example: I have read and agree to the Terms
        of Service listed above.
            Customers will not be able to proceed with the order until they select the
            acceptance check box. If you leave this field empty, no confirmation is requested
            from your customers and no check box is displayed below your terms of service.




                         Figure 58: Specifying Terms of Service for Your Customers

Previewing Your Catalog
      Once you add a product to your catalog, you can preview it and make a test purchase
      to see how your customers will navigate your online store and place their orders. To do
      so, click the    Preview button at the bottom of Plesk Sitebuilder window and navigate
      to the online store page.

      For each product, the following details are displayed to your site visitors:
           Product name. By clicking it a visitor proceeds to the product details page.
           Product image thumbnail, if uploaded. Clicking the thumbnail opens a full-size
            product image in the new window.
           Brief product description, if specified.
           Product color options, if specified (displayed as square icons of appropriate color).
           Other options of the products, if specified (for example, size).
           Product price, given in the currency of your online store (see Setting Currency and
            Price Format (on page 100)).
Populating Site with Content    107


    If the product is set as an "advertise only" item and its price is set to ' 0 ' (zero),
    price is not shown for this product. For sellable products with zero price, price is
    shown as ' 0.00 '.
   Actions available for the product:
       For products which have no color and other options specified - the Add to Cart
        and Buy buttons.
       For products which allow several options to choose from - the Select and Buy
        button, which leads to the product page.
    If the product is set as an "advertise only" item, no action buttons are displayed.




                                Figure 59: Catalog Front Page

By clicking the product name, your site visitor gets to the product page on which the
following information is shown:
   Product name.
   Product image thumbnail, if uploaded. Clicking on the thumbnail opens a full-size
    product image in the new window.
   Full product description.
   Product color options, if specified. For each color option, your visitors will see:
       A clickable icon of appropriate color. Clicking an icon will display the image of
        the product in this color modification (if uploaded).
       The color name you specified while adding this color option.
   Other options of the product, if specified. Each option is shown as a drop-down list
    from which visitors select a desired value.
   Product price.
   The Add to Cart and Buy buttons.
   The Back to catalog shortcut.
108       Populating Site with Content




                                         Figure 60: Product Details Page

      When your customers click Add to Cart for a certain product in the catalog, this product
      is added to their shopping cart. Having filled the cart, customers click Buy to proceed to
      the shopping cart itself and actually purchase the items.

      The first page of your shopping cart displays the following details:
           For each product: the product name and color/other options, price per item,
            quantity, and the product subtotal (quantity x price). Customers can specify any
            quantity for each product they want to purchase, or, if necessary, delete items from
            the shopping cart by clicking Delete or by setting "0" in the Quantity field.
           The order total (without shipping).




                                          Figure 61: Precheckout Page

      On the second page of the cart, your buyers are asked to fill in their contact
      information, select a payment method and a shipping cost (if you have previously
      specified any shipping costs).
Populating Site with Content   109




                              Figure 62: Checkout Page

On the last page of your shopping cart, a buyer sees their full purchase details,
including the shopping cart contents, contact details, selected payment and shipping
methods. The buyer can edit any of these data. If you, as the online store owner, have
specified your Terms of service, they are also displayed on this final page.
110    Populating Site with Content




                                      Figure 63: Final Checkout Page

      By clicking Continue buyer completes the purchase. An order is placed in Plesk
      Sitebuilder (with a New status), order confirmation is sent to the customer's e-mail, and
      a payment transaction is initiated (in case one of the online payment options was
      chosen).

Setting Up Customer Order Notification
      You can customize automatic order confirmation message sent to your buyers by Plesk
      Sitebuilder.

       To set up order notification message:
      1 On the     eShop page, go to the Notifications tab.
      2 In the E-mail field, enter the e-mail to be displayed in the From field of
        the notification e-mail.
      3 In the Subject field, enter the subject of the notification e-mail.
      4 In the Message field, enter the text of the notification e-mail.
         You can insert the following macros into the body of the notification message:
            Site URL
Populating Site with Content   111


         The shopping cart contents
      To insert these macros, choose them from the Macro list on the WYSIWYG panel.




                      Figure 64: Setting Up Customer Order Notification

Making Your Catalog Searchable by Google
   Submitting information about your products to Google Base will make your catalog
   searchable on Google Product Search (http://www.google.com/products), Google Maps
   (http://maps.google.com/) and on the main Google web search (http://www.google.com/).

   To submit a catalog to Google Base means to upload an XML file containing the
   information about your products to your Google Base account. Creating such a file
   does not require any XML knowledge because Plesk Sitebuilder will automatically
   convert all information from your catalog into RSS 2.0 XML file fully compatible with
   Google Base requirements.

   In this XML file, Plesk Sitebuilder puts the following information about each your
   product: product name, the category a product belongs to, full product description,
   price, quantity on stock, color, other options (size, etc.), and a link to the product page.
   Regular product options, such as Apparel size, and Shoe size (US, UK, EU), are
   automatically indexed with the corresponding Google Base attribute (g:size). If you
   have specified some custom options for your products (such as country of origin,
   dimensions, manufacturer/brand name, etc.), and wish to make your catalog
   searchable by them as well, you will need to index these options manually as described
   in Indexing Custom Product Options (see page 114).

   To submit your catalog to Google Base, use the Bulk Upload option. Google Base
   allows you to upload up to 100000 items per bulk upload, with a maximum file size of
   20MB. If you wish to upload a larger file, contact Google Base for assistance
   (http://base.google.com/support/bin/request.py). Prior to uploading information to
   Google Base, we recommend to make sure that your online catalog information
   complies with the Google Base Program Policies
   (http://base.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=61118&topic=2906).
112    Populating Site with Content



      To upload your catalog to Google Base, you need a Google account. If you do not have
      a Google account yet, click here (https://www.google.com/accounts/NewAccount) to
      register one.

       To submit your catalog to Google Base:
      1 Open your site preview and go to the online store page.
      2 Right-click the RSS link on the catalog page and select Save Target As...
        (in Internet Explorer), or Save Link As... (in Mozilla Firefox) from the
        context menu and save the file with .xml extension.




                     Figure 65: Submitting Your Catalog to Google Base. Step 1.

         Note: In Internet Explorer, specify any arbitrary name in the File name field, and
         leave the default option XML Document selected in the Save as type field.
         In Mozilla Firefox, specify the file name in format filename.xml in the File name field,
         and select All Files from the Save as type field. Having saved the file, make sure that it
         keeps the .xml extension.
      3 Open the Bulk Upload Instructions page on Google Base web site
        (http://base.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=59537&hl=en )
        and click the Get started: register and submit your bulk upload link at the
        bottom of the page.
      4 On the About Me page, you will be asked to provide the Display name,
        Description (optional) and Website URL (optional) to be displayed on your
        Google Base account page.
         By default, the Display name field contains your e-mail address specified at Google
         account registration. You may leave this default value as is, leave the optional fields
         blank and proceed. If later you wish to specify or edit this information, go to the
         Settings tab of your Google Base account page, specify the information and click
         Save Changes at the bottom of the page.
      5 Click Next to continue.
      6 On the Specify a Bulk Upload page:
Populating Site with Content       113


      Enter any arbitrary name for the uploaded file in the File name field. Under this
       name the file will appear on the Bulk Upload tab of your Google Base account
       page.
       Note: The file name must also end with the .xml extension. The file name may
          contain Latin characters and numbers only, and may not contain spaces.
      Select the Item type (the type of items in your online catalog) from the provided
       drop-down box, or specify your custom item type.
7 Click Register bulk upload file and continue to formatting instructions at the
  bottom of the page.
8 On the Format your Products page, click I'm done formatting my file. Continue to
  upload.
   All basic formatting of your catalog is done automatically by Plesk Sitebuilder. For
   instructions on specifying RSS attributes for additional product options (such as
   size, country of origin and other parameters), read section Indexing Custom Product
   Options (on page 114).
9 On the file upload page, click Browse, locate the catalog file in your
  local file system and click Upload and process this file.
   The Google Base dashboard will show status Processing bulk upload file for your file.
   Items submitted via bulk upload are indexed within 24 hours. After the file is
   successfully processed, the file status turns to Success, denoting that your catalog
   items are now searchable by Google.
   If the page shows status Bulk upload failure, click the See details and get help link for
   troubleshooting instructions. Try fixing the issue and re-uploading the file (by
   clicking the delete this file link and repeating the bulk upload procedure).

   In this section:
   Indexing Custom Product Options......................................................................114
114       Populating Site with Content




Indexing Custom Product Options
      Prior to submitting your product catalog to Google Base, consider indexing the relevant
      custom options for each of your products. You can specify option attributes in one of
      the following formats:
           Regular Google Base attributes marked with the "g:" prefix (g:made_in, g:width,
            etc.)
      Custom attributes you can create in Google Base, starting with the "c:" prefix Attributes
      from namespaces other than g: and c: are not allowed.

       To index your product properties with regular Google Base attributes:
      1 On the    eShop page, click the name of the product you wish to index
        the properties for.
      2 On the Options tab, in the field Name in RSS feed, specify a corresponding
        Google Base attribute for each relevant product option.
            For regular eShop options, such as Apparel size, and Shoe size (US, UK, EU), the
            corresponding Google Base attribute (g:size) is specified automatically by Plesk
            Sitebuilder.
            Note: Specify the full RSS attribute name, without the brackets (for example,
            g:made_in).
            For a list of Google Base tags, refer to Appendix (on page 170). The full list of option
            tags is available on the Google Base web site
            (http://base.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=59451&hl=en).
      3 Click OK.
      If you do not find the attribute that properly describes your product option in the list of
      regular Google Base attributes, you can create a custom one. For detailed information
      on creating custom Google Base tags, refer to Google Base web site
      (http://base.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=59558&hl=en).

      Note: The possibility to specify data type for an option is not supported by Plesk
      Sitebuilder. You specify the namespace prefix and the tag name only; the data type is
      set to its default value - String, which allows inputting any arbitrary text string containing
      any characters (except for line breaks).
Populating Site with Content   115




                             Figure 66: Adding Product Options

Supplying Your Product Catalog as RSS Feed
   Subscribing to your catalog RSS feed enables the customers to browse your product
   offerings and check for updates on a regular basis. Converting the contents of your
   online store catalog to RSS 2.0 format is done automatically by Plesk Sitebuilder: the
      RSS button is placed on the front page of your online store and by clicking this
   button, the customers proceed to a page where they can subscribe to your catalog
   RSS feed. The same RSS button is also shown on each category page, allowing your
   customers to monitor certain product categories only.

   In Internet Explorer starting from version 7.0, the subscription is done by adding your
   feed to the browser's Favorites Center. In Mozilla Firefox, your customers will be
   suggested to subscribe either by adding your feed to their bookmarks or by using one
   of proposed RSS reader applications (Google, My Yahoo, Bloglines, and other).
116       Populating Site with Content




                        Figure 67: Customer Subscription to Your Catalog RSS Feed

      If necessary, interested buyers and partners can incorporate your eShop RSS channel
      into their own web pages. To do so, they can use one of specialized add-ons - such as
      the Plesk Sitebuilder module RSS Reader (see page 148).

      The appearance of your product catalog in the RSS feed is as follows:
           All products are shown in a single sheet, not sorted by category.
           Products are shown in the order you define on the Products tab of your online store.
      For each product, the RSS feed displays:
Populating Site with Content   117


      The product name. By clicking it, customer proceeds to the product page of your
       online store, from which he or she can buy a product, or navigate to other pages of
       your online store.
      The product image (if uploaded).
      The full description of the product (if specified).
   In some cases, you may need to provide the RSS feed hyperlink to interested third
   parties.

    To obtain the link to your catalog RSS feed:
   1 On the         eShop page, click Preview.
   2 On the site preview, go to the online store page.
   3 Right-click the RSS button on the main page of your store catalog
     and choose the Open in New Window option from the context menu.




              Figure 68: Supplying Your Product Catalog as RSS Feed. Step 1.
   4 Copy the link of the RSS feed page from the browser address bar.
   You can supply this link to your partners by e-mail or otherwise.

Managing Customers' Orders
   After a buyer completes and submits the Checkout form, an order is placed in your
   store. It appears in the list of orders on the Orders tab of the eShop page.

   You can perform the following operations with an order:
      Change the order status
      Specify a comment for an order (for example, the reason of order cancellation, or
       other order-specific information).
    To manage an order:
   1 On the         eShop page, go to the Orders tab.
118       Populating Site with Content


      2 Click the   Edit icon beside an order.
      3 From the Status list, select a status for the order.
            Orders can have one of the following statuses:
               New status is automatically assigned to all new unpaid orders in the system.
               Payment pending status is assigned automatically by online payment gateways to
                indicate that payment is in progress.
               Paid status is automatically assigned to orders after online payment gateway
                reports a successful transaction.
               Processed status is set manually for orders being processed at the time.
               Backorder status is set manually to indicate deferred orders.
               Completed status is set manually for orders which have been completed and
                delivered to the customers.
               Cancelled status is set manually for orders cancelled by customers (for example,
                after you receive the corresponding request from your customer).
               Failed status is automatically assigned to orders processed by online payment
                systems in case the payment transaction fails.
            Note: For offline payment options (Cash on Delivery and Cash/Money Order) you can
            specify the Paid, Payment pending or Failed statuses manually.
      4 To attach a comment to the order, specify the required information in
        the Comment field.
            Commented orders are marked with the           icon on the Orders tab. Hovering over
            this icon will display the comment text.


Providing Content for Download
      The File Download module allows providing content for download to your site visitors.
      The file format is arbitrary; the maximum size of the file is determined by parameters of
      your network.

       To add File Download module to your site:
      1 On the Pages step, select               File Download in the Special pages box.
      2 Click                    .
      You can place only one file on the File Download page. If you wish to provide several
      files for download, add as many File Download pages to your site map as necessary.

       To upload a file you wish to provide for download:
      1     On the Edit step, select     File Download in the Site map area.
      2     Click Browse, select a file and click Open.
      3     Click Upload.
      4     Specify a name for the file in the File name field.
            Under this name the file will be displayed to site visitors. By default, it is the original
            name of the uploaded file.
Populating Site with Content   119



      Note: National characters in file extensions are not supported. If your file extension
      contains national characters, replace them with Latin characters, or append dot and
      zero (.0) at the end of the string.
   5 If you want to leave your site visitors the choice to open or save the
     file, leave the Open file in browser option unselected.
      If you want the file just to open in a visitor's browser window, select the Open file in
      browser option.
   In the upper part of the screen you will see the results of the operation and the file size.

   To replace the uploaded file, click Browse once again and select another file.

   To ensure that the file download works correctly, you can perform a test download of
   the file. To do so, click the Download shortcut.




                             Figure 69: Providing Content for Download


Adding Flash Intro
   A flash intro is a flash-animated introduction clip launched prior to opening the home
   page of a site. You can choose between several designs of the intro and insert your
   own text information into it.

   The Flash Intro module is the only page module that requires no PHP on the publishing
   location and therefore can be included into a static site.

   Note: For correct display of Asian and Arabian national characters, make sure that you
   have Adobe Flash Player version 9.0 or later installed.

   You can add only one Flash Intro module to your site.

    To add a flash intro to your site:
   1 Go to the Pages step.
   2 Select        Flash Intro in the Special pages box.

   3 Click               .
   The Flash Intro page is always places as the first page in the site structure.
120    Populating Site with Content



       To configure the flash intro settings:
      1 Go to the Edit step.
      2 Select         Flash Intro in the Site map area.
      3 Select a design of your flash clip by clicking one of the thumbnails in
        the Designs area.
         The selected design is outlined with a red frame.
      4 In Title field, enter a text to be displayed as the flash introduction title -
        it will appear first and in a larger font.
         Please bear in mind that the title of the page itself, as it will appear in the site menu
         and in the browser title bar, is to be specified separately in the Site map area.
      5 In the Body text field, enter a text to be displayed in the body of the
        flash clip.
      6 From the Background color list, select the background color for the flash
        clip.
      7 From the Animation pattern list, select the type of small elements to be
        used in clip animation.
      You can see a small preview image of the flash clip with the new parameters in the
      Preview area.




                                      Figure 70: Adding Flash Intro


Adding Forum
      Online forums are web-based message boards where visitors can open new topics,
      post topic-relevant messages, and discuss a wide range of questions.
Populating Site with Content         121



 To add a forum to your site:
1 Go to the Pages step.
2 Select            Forum in the Special pages box.

3 Click                    .
You can add several forums to your site.

 To proceed to setting up your forum:
1 Go to the Edit step.
2 Click           Forum in the Site map.




                                          Figure 71: Forum Editor

In this section:
Managing Forum Topics .................................................................................... 122
Managing Replies to Topics .............................................................................. 124
Managing Categories of Forum Topics .............................................................. 126
Setting Up Forum Appearance .......................................................................... 128
122    Populating Site with Content



Managing Forum Topics
      After you add a forum to your site, you can try it and post a new topic. The procedures
      of managing forum topics are described in the current section.

      Plesk Sitebuilder offers you two default topics, which you can remove (see page 123) at
      a later stage.

      Note: To prevent automated computer generated spam messages, anonymous users
      will be required to enter a confirmation code to be able to post in your forum.


Adding Topic to Your Forum

       To add a topic:
      1 On the          Forum page, go to the Content tab.
      2 Click   Add New Topic.
      3 On the Main Properties tab, enter the subject of a topic in the Subject
        field.
      4 Enter the first message in the topic in the Description field.




                                Figure 72: Creating Topic Subject and Text
Populating Site with Content   123


       All topics you create in the Wizard are authored by Administrator. If you wish to
       create a topic under a different author's name, go to the site preview by clicking
       Preview, navigate to the forum page, and create a topic there. Having created a
       topic on the site, you can edit its main properties (see page 123) in the Wizard. If you
       are editing your forum on the published site, republish the site (see page 164) so that
       your changes take effect.
    5 If you want to assign the topic to some category, click the Categories
      tab and select the desired category.




                           Figure 73: Referring a Topic to a Category
    6 Click OK.
    By default, the module contains two default categories. After you add some new
    categories (see page 126), or edit the existing ones (see page 126), you can refer the
    topic to a desired category, or to several categories.


Editing Topic

     To edit a topic:
    1 On the        Forum page, go to the Content tab.

    2 Click the     Edit icon against the topic you want to edit.
    3 Edit the topic content and properties as desired.
    4 Click OK.

Removing Topic

     To remove a topic:
    1 On the        Forum page, go to the Content tab.
    2 Select the topic you want to remove.
    3 Click       Remove Selected.
124    Populating Site with Content



Managing Replies to Topics
      After some topics were added to your forum, you and your site visitors can add replies
      to these topics. You can edit and manage both your own and your site visitors' replies.
      The procedures of managing replies to topics are described in the current section.

      Note: To prevent automated computer generated spam messages, anonymous users
      will be required to enter a confirmation code to be able to post in your forum.


Adding Reply

       To add a reply:
      1 On the          Forum page, go to the Content tab.
      2 Click the subject of the topic to which you want to post a reply.
      3 Click         Add New Reply.
      4 Enter the reply text.
      5 Click OK.
      To return to the list of topics, click   Back to Topics.




                               Figure 74: Adding a Reply to a Forum Topic

      All replies you create in the Wizard are authored by Administrator. If you wish to add a
      reply under a different author's name, go to the site preview by clicking Preview at the
      bottom of the page, navigate to the forum page in your site menu, and add a reply
      there. Having created a reply on the site, you can edit its main properties (see page 124)
      in the Wizard. If you are editing a forum on a published site, republish the site (see page
      164) so that your changes take effect.
Populating Site with Content   125




Editing Reply

     To edit a reply:
    1 On the     Forum page, go to the Content tab.
    2 Click the subject of the required topic.
    3 Click the     Edit icon beside the required comment.
    4 Edit the reply text as desired.
    5 Click OK.
    To return to the list of topics, click   Back to Topics.


Removing Reply

     To remove a reply:
    1 On the         Forum page, go to the Content tab.
    2 Click the subject of the required topic.
    3 Select a comment and click                Remove Selected.
126    Populating Site with Content



Managing Categories of Forum Topics
      You can arrange the topics in categories by subjects they discuss. The procedures of
      adding and managing categories are described in the current section.


Adding Category

       To add a category:
      1 On the          Forum page, click the Categories tab.
      2 Click   Add New Category.
      3 Enter a name of the new category in the Name field.
      4 If you want to provide a short description for the category, enter it on
        the Description tab.
      5 Click OK.




                            Figure 75: Creating a Category for Forum Topics

      Sitebuilder offers two default categories, which you can remove (see page 127) or edit as
      desired (see page 126).


Editing Category

       To edit a category:
      1 On the          Forum page, click the Categories tab.
      2 Click the    Edit icon beside the category you want to edit.
      3 Edit the category parameters as desired.
Populating Site with Content   127


    4 Click OK.

Removing Category

     To remove a category:
    1 On the    Forum page, click the Categories tab.
    2 Select the forum category you want to remove.
    3 Click     Remove Selected.
128    Populating Site with Content



Setting Up Forum Appearance
       To set up the appearance of your forum:
      1 On the    Forum page, click the Settings tab.
      2 Specify the maximum number of topics to be displayed on one page.
      3 Specify the maximum number of replies to be displayed on one page.
      To preview your forum appearance, click Preview at the bottom of the Plesk Sitebuilder
      window and go to the forum page of your web site.




                                  Figure 76: Setting Up Forum Appearance


Adding Guestbook
      On the guestbook page, your visitors will be able to leave their notes, messages, and
      comments. The main difference between guestbooks and online forums is that in
      forums, all messages are grouped in threads, or topics. In guestbooks, all messages
      are displayed as they have been submitted, in the reverse order (new messages
      appearing on the top).

       To add a guestbook to your site:
      1 Go to the Pages step.
      2 Select         Guestbook in the Special pages box.

      3 Click                 .
      You can add several guestbooks to your site.

       To proceed to setting up your guestbook:
      1 Go to the Edit step.
      2 Click        Guestbook in the Site map.
Populating Site with Content       129




                                    Figure 77: Adding Guestbook

In this section:
Managing Guestbook Messages ....................................................................... 130
Setting Up Guestbook Appearance ................................................................... 132
130       Populating Site with Content



Managing Guestbook Messages
      After you add the guestbook to your site, you can try it and post a new message. The
      procedures of managing guestbook messages are described in the current section.

      The module contains two default messages, which you can remove (see page 131) or
      edit as desired (see page 130).

      Note: To prevent automated computer generated spam messages, anonymous users
      will be required to enter a confirmation code to be able to post in your guestbook.


Adding Message to Your Guestbook

       To add a message:
      1 On the             Guestbook page, go to the Content tab.
      2     Click    Add New Message.
      3     In the Author field, specify the author of the message.
      4     If necessary, specify your e-mail address in the E-mail field.
      5     If necessary, specify the URL to your web site or other Internet
            resource of interest in the URL field.
      6 Enter the message text in the Message field.
      7 Click OK.




                                Figure 78: Adding Message to Your Guestbook
Populating Site with Content   131




Editing Message

     To edit a message:
    1 On the      Guestbook page, go to the Content tab.
    2 Click the   Edit icon against the message you want to edit.
    3 Edit the message as desired.
    4 Click OK.

Removing Message

     To remove a message:
    1 On the      Guestbook page, go to the Content tab.
    2 Select the message you want to remove.
    3 Click     Remove Selected.
132    Populating Site with Content



Setting Up Guestbook Appearance
       To set up the appearance of your guestbook:
      1 On the      Guestbook page, go to the Settings tab.
      2 In the Message lifetime field, enter the number of days after which the
        messages will be added to archive. Whether a message is or is not
        archived is shown in the S column on the Content tab.
      3 In the Number of messages per page, specify the number of messages to
        be displayed on one guestbook page.
      4 If you want the message authors' e-mails to be displayed to
        guestbook visitors, select the Show author's e-mail check box.
      5 In the field Text shown before the Guestbook, enter the text to appear at the
        top of the guestbook page on your site.
      To preview your guestbook appearance, click Preview at the bottom of the Plesk
      Sitebuilder window and go to the guestbook page of your web site.




                              Figure 79: Setting Up Guestbook Appearance


Providing Registration to Your Site Visitors
      You can set up voluntary user registration on your web site. This function has nothing
      to do with restricted access. Logged in users do not have to enter their name, address,
      and other data each time they fill a form on the site - this data is automatically inserted
      into the appropriate text fields of the form (for example, when posting to blog or buying
      in e-shop).
Populating Site with Content         133



Note: To prevent automated registration, users will be required to enter a confirmation
code to be able to register on your site.

 To enable registration on your site:
1 Go to the Pages step.
2 Select          Registration in the Special pages box.

3 Click                   .
 To proceed to setting up registration settings:
1 Go to the Edit step.
2 Select the            Registration page in the Site map.

   In this section:
   Configuring General Settings .............................................................................134
   Configuring Autoresponder Messages ...............................................................134
   Managing Registered Site Visitors .....................................................................135
134       Populating Site with Content



Configuring General Settings
       To configure general registration settings:
      1 On the     Registration page, go to the Common Settings tab.
      2 To let site visitors register accounts on your site without your
        participation, select the Enable Registration check box.
            If you disable this option, only users registered by you will be able to log in using
            the credentials you provide.
            You can register accounts for site visitors in your Administrator Panel, after you
            publish the site (see Managing Registered Site Visitors (on page 135)).
      3 To let registered visitors recover their forgotten passwords, select the
        Enable Forgot your password option check box.




                             Figure 80: Configuring General Registration Settings

      When a site visitor accesses the registration page, they are offered to register or log in
      using their existing account.




                                         Figure 81: Registration Page

Configuring Autoresponder Messages
      In Plesk Sitebuilder, you can set up two types of autoresponder messages for
      registered visitors:
           A sign-up message sent to newly registered users.
Populating Site with Content   135


      A password recovery message sent to users after they use the "forgotten
       password" option on your site.
    To configure autoresponders sent to visitors:
   1 On the    Registration page, click the Notifications Settings tab.
   2 Configure the settings common for notifications of all types:
          Name - the name of the notification sender
          E-mail address - the notification sender's e-mail
   3 Select the type of notification to be configured from the Notification type
     box.
   4 Configure the notification subject and message text as desired .
       You can insert the following macros in the message body:
          %userLogin - visitor's login
          %userPassword - visitor's password
          %userFirstname - visitor's first name
          %userLastname - visitor's last name
          %siteURL - the URL of your site




           Figure 82: Configuring Autoresponder Messages Sent to Registered Users

Managing Registered Site Visitors
   With the Registration module, you can create new and manage existing site visitor
   accounts.

    To proceed to managing site visitor accounts:
   1 On the         Registration page, go to the Site Users tab.
136    Populating Site with Content




Adding Site Visitor Account
      If you want to provide your site visitors with ready accounts, you can register them in
      your Administrator Panel and then provide the site visitors their credentials for
      authenticating on the site.

       To add a site visitor account:
      1 On the          Registration page, go to the Site Users tab.
      2 Click        Add New Account.
      3 Specify the contact and login information for the user account.
      4 Click OK.

Changing Site Visitor Account Information

      You may need to modify a site visitor's account if, for example, a site visitor forgets his
      or her password or specifies wrong e-mail.

       To modify a site visitor account:
      1 On the          Registration page, go to the Site Users tab.
      2 Click the name of the appropriate site visitor.
      3 Make the necessary changes.
      4 Click OK.
Populating Site with Content     137




Suspending and Unsuspending Site Visitor Account
    By default, all created site visitor accounts are active. If an account is active, the site
    visitor can log in on the Registration page with his or her credentials. If, due to some
    reasons, you want to prohibit a site visitor from authenticating on the site, you can
    suspend his or her account.

     To suspend a site visitor account:
    1 On the         Registration page, go to the Site Users tab.
    2 Select the site visitor account you want to suspend.
    3 Click       Deactivate.
       Suspended site user accounts are indicated with the          icon.

     To unsuspend a site visitor account:
    1 On the         Registration page, go to the Site Users tab.
    2 Select the suspended site visitor account you want to unsuspend.
    3 Click       Activate.
       Active site visitor accounts are indicated with the      icon.

Removing Site Visitor Account

     To remove a site visitor account:
    1 On the         Registration page, go to the Site Users tab.
    2 Select the site visitor account you want to delete.
    3 Click       Delete.
138    Populating Site with Content




Incorporating Link to External Page into Your Site Menu
      Adding links to external pages to your site menu allows you to advertise your partners'
      or friends' web sites or to redirect visitors to some online services or information
      sources directly from your site menu.

       To incorporate a link to an external page into your site menu:
      1 Go to the Pages step.
      2 Select          External Page in the Special pages box.

      3 Click           .
      4 Go to the Edit step.
      5 Select     External Page in the Site map.
      6 In the URL field, specify the web address of the external page (http://,
        https:// or ftp://).
          When a site visitor clicks a menu item linked to an external page, the page opens in
          the same window.




                  Figure 83: Incorporating Link to External Page into Your Site Menu


Adding Maps
      You can add maps to your site, thus displaying any location that may be of interest to
      your site visitors.

      To add geographical maps to your site, you can either use the free-of-charge Google
      Maps service (see page 139), or purchase an account with the Microsoft MapPoint Web
      Service (see page 141) from Microsoft, Inc.

      In this section:
      Configuring Google Maps API Service .............................................................. 139
      Configuring Microsoft MapPoint Web Service.................................................... 141
Populating Site with Content   139



Configuring Google Maps API Service
   The Google Maps API service lets you insert Google maps in your web pages. You can
   add overlays to the map (including markers and polylines) and display shadowed "info
   windows". To be able to use the feature on your site, you need to get the Google Maps
   API key for your site URL.

   The Google Maps API service supports the following browsers:
      Internet Explorer 6.0 and later
      Firefox 0.8 and later
      Safari 1.2.4 and later
      Netscape 7.1 and later
      Mozilla 1.4 and later
      Opera 8.02 and later
    To insert a Google map into a page:
   1 Go to the Edit step.
   2 In the Modules area, click the Area Map module icon and keeping the
     left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the
     page.
       To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title
       in the Modules area.
   3 Click Service provider settings on the title bar of the Area Map module.




              Figure 84: Selecting Google Maps as a Mapping Service Provider
   4 Select Google Maps API service.
   5 Enter your registration key in the Google Maps API key box and click OK.
       If you haven't registered this service with Google yet, click the link provided on the
       dialog window and complete the free sign up procedure as described. When
       registering a Google Maps API key, be sure to specify the correct site URL.
   6 Click Choose location.
140    Populating Site with Content




      Figure 85: Specifying a Geographical Location to Be Shown on the Map (Google Maps)
      7 Type the name of the geographical location you want to show and
        click Find Location.
         If for some reason Google doesn't find the required location, or if you want to
         specify your own location, enter the name of a larger geographical object (the city,
         country, etc.) in the Find Location box, and then use the arrows and scaling functions
         to manually navigate to the required geographical point.
      8 Click on the required point on the map. On the form that appears,
        specify the title and address of the location in the Title and Address
        fields and click Save.
         You may leave both these fields blank.
Populating Site with Content   141




           Figure 86: Specifying Geographical Location Properties (Google Maps)
   9 Click OK.
   On the map, a marker appears at the specified point. The title and address of the
   location is displayed to your site visitors after they click on the marker.

   For full information on configuring driving directions and other Google Maps features,
   refer to Google Maps API FAQ (http://code.google.com/support/bin/topic.py?topic=10028).

Configuring Microsoft MapPoint Web Service
   In order to use the Microsoft MapPoint Web Service on your pages, you first need to
   purchase this service from Microsoft, Inc.

   You can choose one of licensing options provided by Microsoft, Inc.:
      Purchase MapPoint Web Service through a direct agreement with Microsoft. If you
       choose this method, you purchase one license per each Area Map module added to
       your sites.
      Purchase MapPoint Web Service through Microsoft Volume Licensing. If you
       choose this method, you purchase one license for all Area Map modules added to all
       your sites.
    To insert a Microsoft MapPoint map into your web page:
   1 Go to the Edit step.
   2 In the Modules area, click the Area Map module icon and keeping the
     left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the
     page.
142    Populating Site with Content


         To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title
         in the Modules area.
      3 Click Service provider settings on the title bar of the Area Map Module.
      4 Select Microsoft MapPoint Web Service.




              Figure 87: Selecting Microsoft MapPoint as a Mapping Service Provider
      5 Enter your Microsoft MapPoint Service credentials in the User name and
        Password fields and click Log in to MS Map.
         If you have not yet purchased a Microsoft MapPoint Service license, click the
         provided link to go to the Microsoft MapPoint Service page, and follow the provided
         instructions.




           Figure 88: Specifying a Geographical Location to Be Shown on the Map (MS
                                          MapPoint)
Populating Site with Content   143


  6 Enter the name of the location you want to show in the Find Locations
    field.
  7 Click Find Locations.
  8 From the list of results, select the location to be displayed on your
    web page.
  9 Click OK.
  Note: If later you change your Microsoft MapPoint Service account settings, click Relog
  in to MS Map. You will be forwarded to the Area Map configuration window, where you can
  enter your new credentials.


Adding Feedback Form
  Online feedback forms enable you to gather visitors’ opinion about your site.

   To set up a feedback form on your site:
  1 Go to the Edit step.
  2 In the Modules area, click the Feedback module icon and keeping the
    left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the
    page.
     To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title
     in the Modules area.
  3 To set up the general properties of your feedback form, click Properties
    on the module title bar and:
        In the Title field, enter a name for the feedback form.
        In the Your e-mail field, enter the e-mail address the filled in feedback forms will
         be sent to.
        In the Subject field, enter the subject of the feedback e-mail message.




                 Figure 89: Configuring General Feedback Form Properties
  4 Click OK.
  5 To arrange the list of fields in your feedback form, click Add/Edit Fields.
144    Populating Site with Content


         By default, the Feedback module contains a number of fields commonly used in
         feedback forms. You can adjust the existing fields, as well as add new ones.




                               Figure 90: Managing Feedback Form Fields

      6 To add a new field, click     Add Field.
      7 From the Name box, select a name for the field.
      8 From the Type field, select the type of data that can be entered in
        current field. The supported data types are:
            String - allows specifying any arbitrary text string. It may include national
             characters, punctuation marks, and spaces, but may not include line breaks.
             The output is displayed in multi-line mode.
            Text - same as string, but with line breaks allowed.
            Phone - allows entering an international phone number. May contain numbers,
             spaces, parenthesis, "+" and "-" symbols.
            E-mail - allows inputting e-mail addresses only.
            Integer - allows entering an integer number (positive, negative, or zero).
            Double - allows entering a floating point number, with a point or a comma as a
             decimal separator. Leading and trailing zeroes are not supported.
            Currency - allows entering a floating point number. Leading and trailing zeroes
             are not supported.
            Date - allows entering a date in format mm/dd/yyyy, with a slash ("/") as a
             separator.
            Password - allows entering any arbitrary text string.
      9 To make a field required for filling in, select the Required check box
        beside the corresponding field.

      10 Set the order of fields in the feedback form by clicking                 or
         beside the respective fields.
      11 To remove a field, select it in the list and click            Delete.
Populating Site with Content   145


12 Click OK.
13 To specify the text to be displayed to the site visitors after they submit
   the feedback form, click Response on the module title bar and type your
   text in the provided field.




   Figure 91: Specifying Text to Be Displayed to Site Visitors after They Submit the
                                   Feedback Form
14 Click OK.
Online feedback forms enable you to gather visitors’ opinion about your site.

 To set up a feedback form on your site:
15 Go to the Edit step.
16 In the Modules area, click the Feedback module icon and keeping the
   left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the
   page.
   To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title
   in the Modules area.
17 To set up the general properties of your feedback form, click Properties
   on the module title bar and:
      In the Title field, enter a name for the feedback form.
      In the Your e-mail field, enter the e-mail address the filled in feedback forms will
       be sent to.
      In the Subject field, enter the subject of the feedback e-mail message.
146    Populating Site with Content




                      Figure 92: Configuring General Feedback Form Properties
      18 Click OK.
      19 To arrange the list of fields in your feedback form, click Add/Edit Fields.
         By default, the Feedback module contains a number of fields commonly used in
         feedback forms. You can adjust the existing fields, as well as add new ones.




                               Figure 93: Managing Feedback Form Fields

      20 To add a new field, click     Add Field.
      21 From the Name box, select a name for the field.
      22 From the Type field, select the type of data that can be entered in
         current field. The supported data types are:
            String - allows specifying any arbitrary text string. It may include national
             characters, punctuation marks, and spaces, but may not include line breaks.
             The output is displayed in multi-line mode.
            Text - same as string, but with line breaks allowed.
            Phone - allows entering an international phone number. May contain numbers,
             spaces, parenthesis, "+" and "-" symbols.
Populating Site with Content   147


      E-mail - allows inputting e-mail addresses only.
      Integer - allows entering an integer number (positive, negative, or zero).
      Double - allows entering a floating point number, with a point or a comma as a
       decimal separator. Leading and trailing zeroes are not supported.
      Currency - allows entering a floating point number. Leading and trailing zeroes
       are not supported.
      Date - allows entering a date in format mm/dd/yyyy, with a slash ("/") as a
       separator.
      Password - allows entering any arbitrary text string.
23 To make a field required for filling in, select the Required check box
   beside the corresponding field.

24 Set the order of fields in the feedback form by clicking                        or
   beside the respective fields.
25 To remove a field, select it in the list and click                Delete.
26 Click OK.
27 To specify the text to be displayed to the site visitors after they submit
   the feedback form, click Response on the module title bar and type your
   text in the provided field.




   Figure 94: Specifying Text to Be Displayed to Site Visitors after They Submit the
                                   Feedback Form
28 Click OK.
148    Populating Site with Content




Adding RSS News Feeds
      RSS, which stands for Really Simple Syndication, allows you to automatically load
      favorite news and information on you site from RSS news feeds (also called
      "channels"). Many well-known news communities and corporate sites offer news
      headlines and article summaries in the form of news channels. RSS readers retrieve
      the recent content from the RSS news feeds and display it on your site. A visitor can
      preview the recent news content from your site and will be redirected to the news page
      if they want to read the full story. The news from RSS channels are updated
      automatically and do not require any interaction from your part.

       To add RSS news feeds to your site:
      1 Go to the Edit step.
      2 In the Modules area, click the RSS Reader module icon and keeping
        the left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on
        the page.
         To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title
         in the Modules area.
      3 Click Properties on the title bar of the RSS Reader module.
      4 Select a channel to import the news from.
         When you roll your mouse over a channel, you can see the channel URL in the field
         below.
Populating Site with Content   149




                      Figure 95: Adding RSS News Feeds
5 If you select the Custom channel, enter the channel URL in the field
  below.
6 Click OK.
150       Populating Site with Content




Inserting Scripts into Your Web Pages
      Using the Script module you can insert ready code snippets in your web pages. You
      can use this module to:
           Add functional elements to your site pages, in addition to the existing Plesk
            Sitebuilder modules. With the help of such elements you can
               Insert video and audio files from YouTube and other streaming media providers
               Display time and date
               Display pop-up messages
               Set up automatic forwarding to other web pages
               Set up a variety of visual effects: change of background color, text effects on
                mouse hover, and more
               Display system information: the list of available PHP extensions, server settings,
                and more
               Participate in banner networks
               Place interactive elements on the page: games (for example, "Miner"),
                calculator, entertainment tests
            - and much more
           Incorporate web pages created in other programs into your Plesk Sitebuilder web
            site.
      Plesk Sitebuilder allows you to add any code written in any scripting or other language
      into the Script module: HTML, DHTML, XML, PHP, ASP, SSI, Perl/CGI, JavaScript,
      Java applets, and many more. You can find all kinds of third party scripts on popular
      webmaster's resources available on the Internet.

      The scripts will work correctly in case the publishing server is configured accordingly.
      Study the Readme files for the script you wish to add, and compare the requirements to
      those of the Plesk Sitebuilder publishing location (see page 169). If there are some
      additional requirements imposed by your scripts, contact your Plesk Sitebuilder
      provider for assistance.

       To insert a script into you web page:
      1 Go to the Edit step.
      2 In the Modules area, click the Script module icon and keeping the left
        mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the
        page.
            To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title
            in the Modules area.
      3 Click Properties on the title bar of the Script module.
      4 In the Script text box, replace the default text with the code of your
        script.
            For example, to insert a video clip from YouTube, copy the piece of HTML markup
            that accompanies the clip and paste it to the Script module editor.
Populating Site with Content   151


5 Click OK.




                   Figure 96: Inserting Scripts into Your Web Pages

To incorporate a web page created in some other program into your Plesk Sitebuilder
site, copy the source code of the desired page and paste it into the Script module as
described above.

Note: 1. Scripts cannot be executed on site preview. To check the script operation,
publish the site and proceed to the corresponding page.

2. Some scripts may require that you upload some additional content in your site home
directory. If you have no access credentials for the publishing location, or do not have
enough permissions for uploading content, contact your hosting provider for
assistance.
152       Populating Site with Content




Conducting Polls and Online Surveys
      Online polls and surveys enable you to receive valuable feedback from your site
      visitors. You can collect votes on different questions and display the results as dynamic
      graphical charts directly on the page. The Plesk Sitebuilder voting module tracks visitor
      uniqueness based on the single session principle - which means that a visitor cannot
      vote several times in one poll within the same user session.

       To set up voting on your site:
      6      Go to the Edit step.
      7 In the Modules area, click the Voting module icon and keeping the left
        mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the
        page.
            To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title
            in the Modules area.
      8 Click Properties on the title bar of the Voting module.
      9 To provide the question of your survey, type your question in the text
        field on the Question tab.




                                 Figure 97: Specifying a Question for Your Poll
      10 To arrange the list of available answers, go to the Answers tab.
            The Voting module must contain at least two answers. By default, the module
            contains two default answers, which you can remove or edit as desired.
      11 To edit the text of an existing answer, type the new text in the current
         answer text field.
Populating Site with Content   153


12 To add an answer, click    Add New Answer and enter the text into the
   newly appeared text field.
   The maximum number of answers is unlimited.




               Figure 98: Specifying Answers to Your Poll Question

13 To change the order in which the answers are displayed, use the
   and      arrows.
14 To delete an answer, select it and click        Remove Selected.
15 Click OK.
154    Populating Site with Content




Adding Online Status Indicator
      Online Status Indicator module allows you to place an icon showing your ICQ or Skype
      status on your site.

       To add an online status indicator to your site:
      1 Go to the Edit step.
      2 In the Modules area, click the Online Status Indicator module icon and
        keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired
        location on the page.
         To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double click the module title in
         the Modules area.
      3 Click Properties on the title bar of the module window.
      4 Select your instant messenger provider: ICQ or Skype.
      5 If you select ICQ:
            Specify your ICQ UIN.
            Select the type of icon to be displayed for your ICQ status.
             The result of your choice is shown in the Preview area.
            Click OK.




                 Figure 99: Setting Up Online Status Indicator for Your ICQ Account
      6 If you select Skype:
            Specify your Skype name.
            Select an icon to be displayed for your Skype status.
             The result of your choice is shown in the Preview area.
            If you want site visitors to be able to call you on Skype directly by clicking the
             status indicator icon, select the Start Skype call upon clicking the icon check box.
Populating Site with Content   155


         Click OK.




           Figure 100: Setting Up Online Status Indicator for Your Skype Account


Adding SitePal Animated Character
   With the help of the SitePal module, you can add SitePal speaking animated characters
   (http://www.sitepal.com) to your site, to enrich site visitor experience and increase
   sales. You can select the preferred character from the SitePal collection, design the
   character and scene as desired, and attach an audio file with your commercial to it.

   You can create SitePal animated scenes in any language, but the editor interface is
   available in English only.

   Note: To ensure correct operation of the module, enable pop-ups for the Plesk
   Sitebuilder server in your web browser settings. For viewing SitePal characters, Adobe
   Flash Player 9.0.115 or later is required.

    To add a SitePal character to your site:
   1 Go to the Edit step.
   2 In the Modules area, click the SitePal module icon and keeping the left
     mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the
     page.
      To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title
      in the Modules area.
   3 To set up a character, click Properties on the module title bar.
156    Populating Site with Content


         When you open the SitePal editor for the first time in your Sitebuilder Wizard, you
         see a pop-up window with a welcome message from SitePal. On this dialog, you
         will also find general information about SitePal characters (on the About Sitepal tab),
         and a list of available SitePal service packages (on the Packages tab).
         If you already have a SitePal account, enter your credentials in the fields provided
         on the welcome screen and log in.
         Important: By default, you are using the Free package, which allows to create only
         two scenes, use only two models, does not allow using the text-to-speech feature
         for creating the scene audio and limits the number of streams (that is, playbacks on
         the site page) to 150 per month. All sites you create in your Plesk Sitebuilder will
         use one common SitePal package - therefore please bear in mind that the allowed
         number of scenes, models and streams per month will be shared between all your
         sites.
         If later you wish to upgrade to one of the premium packages, use one of the
         following methods:
            Click the UPGRADE or BUY button above the scene preview window. Such
             buttons appear each time you try to use a paid model or feature while working
             with a Free package.
            Use the Upgrade Your Account button at the bottom of the page. This button
             appears after you save your first scene.
         To proceed, close the window. You can view this information any time later by
         clicking             About.




                                       Figure 101: SitePal Editor
      4 In the SitePal editor, select the model you like on the Model Gallery tab.
Populating Site with Content   157


   The default Free SitePal package allows you to use only two models, which you can
   choose among the free models only. Paid models are marked with the       icon. To
   filter out free models, select the Show only the models I own check box.
   If you wish to purchase a model (which requires upgrading to one of the premium
   packages), click UPGRADE or BUY above the scene preview window and follow the
   purchasing instructions on the SitePal web site.
5 On the Accessories step, adjust the parameters of the model's exterior.
      On the Style tab, choose the hair style, clothes, accessories and other attributes
       for the model by switching between the attribute thumbnails and selecting the
       preferred design for each attribute in the work area.
      On the Color tab, adjust the color of the model's hair, skin, eyes, make-up and
       mouth.
      On the Attributes tab you can adjust additional exterior parameters and age the
       model if necessary.
6 On the Backgrounds step, choose a background for the scene.
   If necessary, upload your own background image by clicking Upload on the
   Background Gallery tab. You can view and manage your custom backgrounds on the
   My Background tab.
7 On the Audios step, attach the audio file with the character's message.
      To produce the audio for the scene using the text-to-speech feature (typed text
       transformed into an audio file), click the TTS tab.
       Type or paste the text in the text box and choose the language and speaker's
       voice for this language from the provided boxes. When you select a language,
       the list of available voices is narrowed down accordingly.
       Note: The text-to-speech feature is not allowed in the default Free package. To
          be able to use the feature, click UPGRADE above the scene preview window
          and follow the package purchasing instructions on the SitePal web site.
      To record a message using a plugged-in microphone, follow the instructions
       provided on the Mic tab.
      To upload the audio file from your computer, follow the instructions provided on
       the Upload tab.
      To have your message recorded by one of professional voices, click the Voice
       Talent tab, click Pick Your Professional Voice below and follow the purchasing
       instructions on the SitePal web site.
      To record a message on the phone, follow the instructions provided on the
       Phone tab.
       You can view, edit or delete the created and uploaded audios on the Saved tab.
       This tab also contains a number of SitePal commercial audios provided as
       examples.
8 On the Players tab, select the style of the SitePal scene window.
9 Click Save Scene.
10 Fill in the registration form that opens and click Register.
158       Populating Site with Content


            After you register with SitePal, the saved scene appears under the Scene List title on
            the left. Together with it, the default second scene appears, which is proposed as a
            basis for your new SitePal scene. Your registration details and the Upgrade Your
            Account button appear at the bottom of the SitePal editor screen.
            Note: The default Free package allows you to create only two scenes. After you
            exceed this limit, each new scene, when saved, replaces one of the former ones
            (the earliest one created).

      11 Click         Settings in the left part of the screen.
      12 In the opened window, configure the basic playback settings for the
         scene and click Apply.
            For instructions on configuring these settings, click on   icons in each section of the
            screen.
      13 Click Publish.
            Configure the publishing parameters: the scene dimensions, and the background
            color against which the progress bar is displayed when the scene is loading. If you
            wish the scene to be uploaded by the secure HTTPS protocol, select the Secure
            Protocol (https) option.
            If you wish the scene to be rendered in browsers with disabled JavaScript (such
            situations are quite rare, but possible), from the Publish To box, select Web Page (no
            Javascript). Otherwise, leave the default Standard Web Page option selected.
      To create a new scene, click the default second scene (the one automatically created
      by SitePal editor) under the Scene List title and configure it as described the current
      procedure.

      If you are using the Free package, after you create and save two scenes, you can only
      reuse models from these scenes; choosing new models, even among the free ones,
      becomes unavailable.

      When reusing a model from one of the previously saved scenes, you have the following
      options:
           To redesign the formerly used model from scratch, select the check box Show only
            the models I own on the Models step and select the model you like.
           To reuse the model together with the previously applied design (clothes, hair style,
            etc.), go to the Saved Models tab on the Models step and select the model you like.
Populating Site with Content   159




Adding Site Map
   The Site Map module allows you to display a clickable hierarchical model of your site
   structure to visitors.

    To add a site map to your site:
   1 Go to the Edit step.
   2 In the Site map area, select the page where you wish to place the site
     map.
   3 In the Modules area, click the Site Map module icon and keeping the
     left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the
     page.
      To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double click the module title in
      the Modules area.
      In the module window, you will see the default view of your site map.
   4 To configure the site map appearance, click Properties on the title bar
     of the module window.
   5 Select the preferred site map layout: One column or Two columns.
   6 Choose Bullet styles for first level and second level pages (separately).
      The options are:
         None (no bullet)
         Circle (○ an open circle)
         Disc (● a solid circle)
         Square ( ■ a solid square)
   7 Click OK.




                      Figure 102: Configuring the Site Map Appearance
CHAPTER 5

Making Your Site Searchable
  Searchability is one of the key parts of your site's success. Putting site online is not
  enough - you should make sure that it can be easily found through search engines like
  Google. Besides, to get your site indexed and searched effectively, it is important to
  specify proper keywords and description for the key pages of your site. See the
  following sections for more details.

  In this chapter:
  Specifying Keywords to be Used by Search Engines ........................................ 160
  Providing Description to be Displayed in Search Results .................................. 161
  Submitting Site to Search Engines .................................................................... 161




Specifying Keywords to be Used by
Search Engines
  Most search engines will use the keywords you choose to properly index your site and
  determine its relevance to search queries. That is why you should think carefully and
  pick only those words that best describe the page. Note that it is not necessary to
  specify keywords for every page, as well as to use too many keywords - three-four
  words for the most important pages will suffice.

   To specify keywords for a page:
  1 Go to the Edit step.
  2 Go to the desired page.
  3 In the Site map area, type the desired keywords in the Page keywords
    field, separating them with a comma.
Making Your Site Searchable   161




Providing Description to be Displayed in
Search Results
  Description you specify at this step will be displayed below the page title when the
  page appears as a result of a user's query on a search engine. Therefore, the
  description should give the main idea of the page so everyone could instantly
  understand what the page is about.

   To provide a page with description:
  1 Go to the Edit step.
  2 Go to the desired page.
  3 In the Site map area, type the desired text in the Page description field.




Submitting Site to Search Engines
  With Plesk Sitebuilder, you can submit your site to two search engines: MSN and
  Google.

   To submit your site to a search engine:
  1 Click Go to Admin Panel.
  2 On the left navigation pane, click            Sites.
  3 Click the name of your site.
  4 Click     Search Engine Submit.
  5 To submit your site to MSN search engine, click Submit your site to MSN
    search engine.
     A new window will open providing you with further instructions.
  6 To submit your site to Google search engine, click Submit your site to
    Google search engine.
     A new window will open saying that the site has been successfully submitted to the
     Google search engine.
CHAPTER 6

Tracking Site Popularity
   If it is allowed by your service plan, you can enable statistics count on your site and
   therefore accumulate and analyze the site attendance statistics, which helps to track
   the popularity of the site. Besides, you can add a counter to your site, so that the total
   number of site visitors would be displayed for all comers. See the following sections for
   more details.

   In this chapter:
   Enabling Statistics Count on Site....................................................................... 162
   Viewing Site Visitors Statistics ........................................................................... 163
   Adding Visitors Counter to Site Pages ............................................................... 163




Enabling Statistics Count on Site
   Note that statistics-related options are available only if the Statistics module is enabled
   in your service plan.

    To enable statistics count on your site:
   1 Click Go to Admin Panel.
   2 On the left navigation pane, click                           Sites.
   3 Click the name of your site.
   4 Click           Statistics Settings.




                            Figure 103: Turning On Statistics Count on a Site
   5 Select the Statistics is turned on check box.
   6 Click OK.
Tracking Site Popularity   163




Viewing Site Visitors Statistics
    To view statistics about site attendance:
   1 Click Go to Admin Panel.
   2 On the left navigation pane, click           Sites.
   3 Click the name of your site.
   4 Click      Site Statistics.




                        Figure 104: Viewing Site Attendance Statistics



Adding Visitors Counter to Site Pages
    To add a counter to your site:
   1 Go to the Pages step.
   2 Select the Add a counter to every page check box.
   3 In the Initial value field, enter a number that will be a starting point for
     the counter.
   4 From the Counter style list, select the appearance of the counter.
   5 Click Save Changes.
CHAPTER 7

Publishing Site
  Publishing your site as an anonymous user

  If you do not have a Plesk Sitebuilder account and work with the program in demo
  mode, the site you create is temporary and cannot be published on the Internet until
  you register a regular user account in Plesk Sitebuilder and buy hosting from your
  Plesk Sitebuilder provider. On the Publish step of the Wizard, you will see a summary of
  your site details which may include the following information:
        The life-time of your trial site, i.e. the period during which it will be stored on the
         Plesk Sitebuilder server.
        The site preview link: the link to your temporary site as it is displayed to the
         visitors. You may send this link to your friends, for example.
        The link to your temporary site in editable mode. This link opens your site in the
         Wizard. You may need this link if you decide to register in Plesk Sitebuilder and
         upgrade your temporary site to a regular one.
        Any supplementary information considered to be important by your Plesk
         Sitebuilder provider, for example, instructions on how to obtain a regular user
         account in Plesk Sitebuilder and buy hosting services.
  If you wish to send this information to your e-mail address, enter the address in the
  field at the bottom of the page and click Send.

  To open the trial site in your web browser, click Visit Site. The site is available during its
  life-time period, which is determined by your Plesk Sitebuilder administrator.




                    Figure 105: Publish Step Look for Anonymous Users
Publishing Site   165



Publishing your site as a regular Plesk Sitebuilder user

If you are a registered Plesk Sitebuilder user, follow the guidelines below to publish or
publish your site.

 To publish your site:
1 Go to the Publish step.
2 If your Plesk Sitebuilder administrator has already specified the
  publishing settings for your site (or you have done it yourself in your
  Administrator Panel), just click Publish. If publishing settings are not
  specified, perform steps 3-8.
   If you see a message telling that the publishing settings are not configured, contact
   your Plesk Sitebuilder administrator for assistance.
   If you see an error message after clicking Publish, contact your Plesk Sitebuilder
   administrator, or follow the link to the publishing details screen (if provided) to know
   the reason of the failure.
3 In the Edit publishing settings section, select a publishing mode (the list
  of available publishing modes is configured by your Plesk Sitebuilder
  provider):
      FTP - publishing site to an FTP server.
      VPS - publishing site to a Virtuozzo Container.
      XCOPY - publishing site using the XCOPY technology.




                          Figure 106: Selecting Publishing Mode

   Note: 1. VPS publishing mode is used for publishing to servers running Parallels
   Business Automation, Standard.
   2. We recommend using XCOPY technology for publishing on local Plesk
   Sitebuilder host only, as this method is insecure and requires writing permissions
   on the specified publishing location.
166    Publishing Site


         Plesk Sitebuilder administrator can prohibit users from editing publishing settings. In
         that case publishing settings will be displayed to you in read-only mode.
      4 If you select FTP publishing mode:
            In the Host field, specify the host to which you want to publish the site.
                 If the maximum number of hosts allowed by your license is limited, select a
                  host from the list. The list of available hosts is configured by your Plesk
                  Sitebuilder administrator.
                 If the number of hosts allowed by your plan is Unlimited, you can specify the
                  IP address or DNS name of any FTP server you have at your disposal (make
                  sure that the server meets the requirements (see page 169)).
            In the Port field, specify the port for connecting to the FTP server. By default, 21
             is set.
            In the Login and Password fields, provide your FTP server access credentials.
            In the Working directory field, specify the directory on the server where the site
             content will be stored after publication.
            In the Web site URL field, enter the web address where the site will be available
             after publishing.
         Note: Make sure that the Web site URL and the Working directory settings point to the
         same publishing location. For example, to publish site with URL
         http://test.url.com/myfolder, specify the working directory myfolder.
      5 If you select VPS publishing mode:
            In the Host field, enter the IP address or domain name of the Parallels Virtuozzo
             Service Container to be used for publishing.
            In the Container ID field, specify an ID number of the target Virtuozzo Container
             on the physical server.
            In the User field, enter the name of the Apache user on the Plesk Sitebuilder
             machine (apache, www-data, etc.).
            In the Group field, specify the name of the Apache group on the Plesk Sitebuilder
             machine (apache, www-data, etc.).
            In the Working directory field, specify the absolute path on the Virtuozzo
             Container to the folder where the site content will be stored after publication.
            In the Web site URL field, enter the web address where the site will be available
             after publication.
         Note: Using this mode you can publish sites only to servers running Parallels
         Business Automation, Standard.
      6 If you select XCOPY publishing mode:
            In the Working directory field, enter the name of a directory (with full path) where
             the files of your site will be stored after publication. For example,
             /var/www/yoursite.
            In the Web site URL field, specify the web address where the site will be available
             after publication.
Publishing Site   167


7 Click Publish, or place your mouse cursor in one of the fields and press
  ENTER. The progress bar appears displaying the status of the
  publishing process.




                       Figure 107: Publishing Progress Indicator
   After successful publishing, your site immediately goes live, and its full functionality
   is available to visitors. You can proceed to your site by clicking Visit Site.




                     Figure 108: Successful Publishing Notification

Republishing your site

After you apply some changes to your site in Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard, you will need to
republish your site.

 To republish your site:
1 Go to the Publish step.
168    Publishing Site


      2 If you wish to preview the changes as they appear on your site, click
        the Preview site link.
      3 If necessary, revise the settings in the Edit publishing settings section.
         Important: If a site contains modules, we do not recommend changing the FTP
         Login for FTP publishing mode. Changing your FTP login will change the home
         directory of the site, and the modules data, which is stored in the former home
         directory, may be lost. If you have access to your publishing server, you can move
         your modules data manually from the former home directory (the path on the server
         will be [Sitebuilder sites directory/Login1/Working directory]) to the new home
         directory ([Sitebuilder sites directory/Login2/Working directory]). If you have no
         access to the publishing server, or insufficient permissions for moving files, leave
         the FTP Login field as is, or contact your Sitebuilder administrator for assistance.
         If you see a notification that the publishing settings have been changed, you have
         an option of returning the settings to their previous state. To do so, click Revert
         Publishing Settings at the bottom of the section.




                  Figure 109: Reverting Publishing Settings to Their Previous State

         If you do not wish to display the Edit publishing settings section again, click the
         icon to close the section. The next time you access the Publish screen for this site,
         the section is not displayed.
      4 To apply changes to the site without republishing the whole site, leave
        the Republish the entire site content option unselected.
Publishing Site        169


      Select this option, if you wish to recover your site in case it has been destroyed or
      damaged at the publishing location.
  5 Click Publish, or place your mouse cursor in one of the fields and press
    ENTER.

      In this chapter:
      Requirements to Host ........................................................................................169




Requirements to Host
  The requirements imposed upon a publishing server depend on the type of sites to be
  published on this server: static or dynamic.

  In Plesk Sitebuilder, a static site is a site which contains only static HTML pages
  created with the help of WYSIWYG editor, and does not contain modules - except for
  the Script and Flash Intro modules. There are no special requirements to a host used
  for static sites publishing.

  A dynamic site is a site with dynamic pages: a site containing at least one module
  (except for the mentioned Script and Flash Intro).

  To guarantee correct operation of dynamic sites, make sure that the publishing location
  meets the following requirements:
     PHP version 4.3.9 or later is installed on the publishing server.
     PHP supports:
         The ionCube PHP Loader 3.1.15 or later
         DOM XML with XSLT support or PHP XSLT extension (Sablotron)
         Multibyte string functions (mbstring extension)
         Zlib compression functions (zlib extension)
         Session handling functions support (session extension)
         SQLite 2.x with UTF-8 encoding support
         GD library 2.0.1 or later
     In php.ini the following directives are installed:
         default_charset = ”UTF-8”
      Note: Make sure that all extensions you have installed are listed in the extensions
      directory and in the php.ini file. If PHP is installed as an Apache module, restart
      Apache after applying the changes.
CHAPTER 8

Appendix. Most Common Google Base
Attributes
  Below you will find a list of some Google Base attributes you might find useful for
  indexing your online store product options.

    Item Type      Attribute                       Description                                 Example

   General       g:brand          The brand name of the product                      Dell, Sony
   Apparel       g:department     The store department that the product falls        men's
                                  under
                 g:made_in        The location where the product was made            Format: ISO 3166
                                                                                     country code.
                                                                                     US
                 g:material       The material the product is made out of            leather
                 g:size           The size of an item                                S, XXL, small, medium
                 g:style          The style of the product                           casual
   Shoes         g:heel_height    The height of the heel of the shoe                 1.5 inches
                 g:width          The width of a shoe                                wide, narrow, regular

   Books and     g:author         The author of the information                      John Steinbeck
   music
                 g:genre          The genre of the product                           Rock and Roll
                 g:artist         The artist or designer that created the work       Michael Jackson
   Consumer     g:functions       Functions and features of the product              photo capacity
   products and
   electronics  g:height          The height of a product                            36 inches
                g:length          The length of a product                            36 inches
                 g:width          The width of a product                             36 inches
                 g:tech_spec_li The URL of technical specifications of the        http://www.example.com/
                 nk             product, if available. This should not forward to product1techspec.html
                                another URL; it must point directly to the target
                                page. The domain name may not be an IP
                                address.
                 g:wireless_int   Wireless interface that the cell phone uses        Bluetooth
                 erface
                 g:battery_life   The average life of the battery, if the computer   Numbers only.
                                  is a laptop, in hours
                                                                                     6
                 g:capacity       For electronic devices, the amount of memory       256 MB
                                  included in a product. For appliances, the
                                  volume of space within the appliance
Appendix. Most Common Google Base Attributes     171


               g:operating_sy The operating system a computer is running        Linux
               stem
               g:optical_drive The type of optical drive included with a        DVD-R
                               computer
               g:processor_s The processor speed for the computer               1.67 GHz
               peed
               g:screen_size   The diagonal screen size                         37 inches
               g:weight        The weight of a product                          20 pounds
               g:focus_type    The type of focus a camera has                   auto, manual, fix
               g:megapixels    The resolution of a digital imaging device       6 MP
               g:zoom          The maximum amount a camera can zoom             10x
               g:display_type The type of display on the television or monitor LCD
               g:color_output Information about whether or not the printer is   Acceptable values are:
                              a color printer                                   false, or true
               g:load_type     The type of loading for a washer                 top, front, etc.
               g:platform      The platform the game is on                      Nintendo Wii
Toys           g:age_range     The suggested age range for the toy              10-14
Vehicles       g:condition     The condition of the vehicle.                    new, used, refurbished
               g:make          The vehicle manufacturer.                        Honda
               g:mileage       The current mileage of the vehicle.              17000
               g:model         The vehicle model.                               Camry
               g:price_type    The type of pricing for the vehicle.             Acceptable values are:
                                                                                negotiable or starting.
               g:title         The name or title of the vehicle.                2003 Honda Civic LX
               g:vehicle_type The type of vehicle.                              car, motorcycle, scooter
               g:vin           Vehicle Identification Number.                   1M8GDM9AXKP042788

               g:year          The model year or year built.                    2003



The full list of Google Base attributes sorted by category is available here
(http://base.google.com/base/products.html), under the Required Attributes title.

More Related Content

PDF
Link building - Estratégias
PDF
Amazon affiliate success handbook, complete niche site and plugin recommendat...
PDF
Web Hosting Operations Guide
PDF
Vanilla Forums Theme Guide
PDF
Monster list of 3,000 high quality back link source
PDF
Seo Book
PDF
seo savage 2012
PPT
Power Up Your Professional Learning Network
Link building - Estratégias
Amazon affiliate success handbook, complete niche site and plugin recommendat...
Web Hosting Operations Guide
Vanilla Forums Theme Guide
Monster list of 3,000 high quality back link source
Seo Book
seo savage 2012
Power Up Your Professional Learning Network

What's hot (19)

PDF
آموزش گوگل آنالیتیکس (Google Analytics) برای تحلیل آمار سایت آموزش گوگل آنا...
PPT
PowerUpYour PPLN
PDF
Connections2.5
DOCX
EDU and GOV Dofollow Backlinks 2017
PDF
Strategic link building
PDF
The must have guide to finding backlinks the mammoth approach
PDF
SEO Footprints by www.Netrix.co.uk - Comprehensive Guide to Website Footprints
PDF
Linux Vs Windows Tco Comparison
PDF
Footprints for backlinks - Find quality backlinks in minutes
PPT
Power Up Your Professional Learning Network
PDF
The Ultimate Guide to Scrapebox - The Only Scrapebox Tutorial You Need
TXT
Footprints
PPT
Designing For Your Least Able User
PPT
How We Make Websites
PPTX
Penguin Slapped - A Case Study - SEMpdx
PDF
Web 2.0 blogs for backlinks - Rank first page in google
PPTX
Brandwatch Masterclass: Tricky Operators
PPTX
Brandwatch Masterclass: Hacks
PPT
Html5 accessibility
آموزش گوگل آنالیتیکس (Google Analytics) برای تحلیل آمار سایت آموزش گوگل آنا...
PowerUpYour PPLN
Connections2.5
EDU and GOV Dofollow Backlinks 2017
Strategic link building
The must have guide to finding backlinks the mammoth approach
SEO Footprints by www.Netrix.co.uk - Comprehensive Guide to Website Footprints
Linux Vs Windows Tco Comparison
Footprints for backlinks - Find quality backlinks in minutes
Power Up Your Professional Learning Network
The Ultimate Guide to Scrapebox - The Only Scrapebox Tutorial You Need
Footprints
Designing For Your Least Able User
How We Make Websites
Penguin Slapped - A Case Study - SEMpdx
Web 2.0 blogs for backlinks - Rank first page in google
Brandwatch Masterclass: Tricky Operators
Brandwatch Masterclass: Hacks
Html5 accessibility
Ad

Viewers also liked (6)

PDF
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
PDF
Virtual Private Servers
PDF
Plesk 8.2 for Windows Backup and Restore Utilities ...
PDF
iPlanet to HP Apache Migration Plan
PPT
Introduction to MySQL - Part 1
PPT
Introduction to Hosting Exchange 2000
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
Virtual Private Servers
Plesk 8.2 for Windows Backup and Restore Utilities ...
iPlanet to HP Apache Migration Plan
Introduction to MySQL - Part 1
Introduction to Hosting Exchange 2000
Ad

Similar to Plesk Sitebuilder 4.5 for Linux/Unix Wizard User's Guide (20)

PDF
Plesk 8.2 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.2 for Windows Domain Administrator's Guide
PDF
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Reseller's Guide
PDF
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Reseller's Guide
PDF
Plesk 9.2-clients-guide
PDF
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Client's Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Client's Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Client's Guide
PDF
User guide
PDF
Plesk For Windows 7.6
PDF
Plesk 8 Client's Guide
PDF
Web Design In Easy Steps 5th Edn Sampler
PDF
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
PDF
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Quick Start Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX
PDF
Plesk 8.1 for Windows
PDF
Website tonight guide
PDF
Dreamweaver cs5 help
Plesk 8.2 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
Plesk 8.2 for Windows Domain Administrator's Guide
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Reseller's Guide
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Reseller's Guide
Plesk 9.2-clients-guide
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Client's Guide
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Client's Guide
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Client's Guide
User guide
Plesk For Windows 7.6
Plesk 8 Client's Guide
Web Design In Easy Steps 5th Edn Sampler
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Quick Start Guide
Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX
Plesk 8.1 for Windows
Website tonight guide
Dreamweaver cs5 help

More from webhostingguy (20)

PPT
File Upload
PDF
Running and Developing Tests with the Apache::Test Framework
PDF
MySQL and memcached Guide
PPT
Novell® iChain® 2.3
PDF
Load-balancing web servers Load-balancing web servers
PDF
SQL Server 2008 Consolidation
PDF
What is mod_perl?
PDF
What is mod_perl?
PDF
Master Service Agreement
PPT
PPT
PHP and MySQL PHP Written as a set of CGI binaries in C in ...
PDF
Dell Reference Architecture Guide Deploying Microsoft® SQL ...
PPT
Managing Diverse IT Infrastructure
PPT
Web design for business.ppt
PPS
IT Power Management Strategy
PPS
Excel and SQL Quick Tricks for Merchandisers
PPT
OLUG_xen.ppt
PPT
Parallels Hosting Products
PPT
Microsoft PowerPoint presentation 2.175 Mb
PDF
Reseller's Guide
File Upload
Running and Developing Tests with the Apache::Test Framework
MySQL and memcached Guide
Novell® iChain® 2.3
Load-balancing web servers Load-balancing web servers
SQL Server 2008 Consolidation
What is mod_perl?
What is mod_perl?
Master Service Agreement
PHP and MySQL PHP Written as a set of CGI binaries in C in ...
Dell Reference Architecture Guide Deploying Microsoft® SQL ...
Managing Diverse IT Infrastructure
Web design for business.ppt
IT Power Management Strategy
Excel and SQL Quick Tricks for Merchandisers
OLUG_xen.ppt
Parallels Hosting Products
Microsoft PowerPoint presentation 2.175 Mb
Reseller's Guide

Plesk Sitebuilder 4.5 for Linux/Unix Wizard User's Guide

  • 2. Copyright Notice ISBN: N/A Parallels 660 SW 39th Street Suite 205 Renton, Washington 98057 USA Phone: +1 (425) 282 6400 Fax: +1 (425) 282 6444 © Copyright 1999-2008, Parallels, Inc. All rights reserved Distribution of this work or derivative of this work in any form is prohibited unless prior written permission is obtained from the copyright holder. Product and service names mentioned herein are the trademarks of their respective owners.
  • 3. Contents Preface 5 About Parallels Plesk Sitebuilder .................................................................................................. 5 What's New in This Version ................................................................................................ 6 About This Guide ........................................................................................................................... 6 Who Should Read This Guide ....................................................................................................... 7 Typographical Conventions ........................................................................................................... 7 Feedback ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard 9 Overview of Main Steps to Create Site ....................................................................................... 10 Logging In to Plesk Sitebuilder .................................................................................................... 10 Learning Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard Interface ............................................................................... 11 Working with Lists ............................................................................................................. 14 Starting to Work with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard ........................................................................... 16 Getting Help ................................................................................................................................. 17 Choosing Type of Created Site 18 Creating Site Design 19 Selecting Design Template for Site ............................................................................................. 21 Removing Design Template from Page ...................................................................................... 22 Selecting Color Scheme .............................................................................................................. 23 Selecting Banner ......................................................................................................................... 23 Selecting Menu Style ................................................................................................................... 24 Uploading Logo ........................................................................................................................... 25 Specifying Site Title, Subtitle, and Footer Message .................................................................... 25 Buying Pictures from Fotolia ....................................................................................................... 26 Creating Site Structure 28 Types of Pages ............................................................................................................................ 31 Structuring Your Site ................................................................................................................... 32 Adding Pages .................................................................................................................... 33 Changing Position of Pages .............................................................................................. 33 Renaming Pages ............................................................................................................... 35 Hiding Pages in Site Navigation ........................................................................................ 35 Removing Pages ............................................................................................................... 37 Choosing Site Language, Currency, and Format of Numbers, Time and Date .......................... 37 Populating Site with Content 39 Working with Text ........................................................................................................................ 41 Applying Styles, Fonts, and Colors to Text ....................................................................... 42 Formatting Paragraphs ..................................................................................................... 42 Copying and Moving Text ................................................................................................. 43 Finding and Replacing Text Fragments ............................................................................ 44
  • 4. Preface 4 Checking Spelling on Page ............................................................................................... 45 Undoing and Redoing Actions........................................................................................... 45 Inserting Links ................................................................................................................... 46 Working with Images ................................................................................................................... 54 Inserting Image.................................................................................................................. 55 Editing Image .................................................................................................................... 59 Removing Image ............................................................................................................... 62 Working with Tables .................................................................................................................... 62 Inserting Table................................................................................................................... 63 Editing Table Properties .................................................................................................... 64 Adding or Removing Rows, Columns, and Cells .............................................................. 65 Editing Cell Properties ....................................................................................................... 67 Merging Cells .................................................................................................................... 68 Spanning Cell across Several Rows or Columns ............................................................. 68 Splitting Cell ...................................................................................................................... 69 Adding Content to Table ................................................................................................... 69 Removing Table ................................................................................................................ 70 Working with Modules ................................................................................................................. 70 Adding Blog ....................................................................................................................... 73 Adding Image Gallery ........................................................................................................ 80 Adding Online Store .......................................................................................................... 88 Providing Content for Download ..................................................................................... 118 Adding Flash Intro ........................................................................................................... 119 Adding Forum .................................................................................................................. 120 Adding Guestbook ........................................................................................................... 128 Providing Registration to Your Site Visitors .................................................................... 132 Incorporating Link to External Page into Your Site Menu ............................................... 138 Adding Maps ................................................................................................................... 138 Adding Feedback Form ................................................................................................... 143 Adding RSS News Feeds ................................................................................................ 148 Inserting Scripts into Your Web Pages ........................................................................... 150 Conducting Polls and Online Surveys ............................................................................. 152 Adding Online Status Indicator........................................................................................ 154 Adding SitePal Animated Character ............................................................................... 155 Adding Site Map .............................................................................................................. 159 Making Your Site Searchable 160 Specifying Keywords to be Used by Search Engines ............................................................... 160 Providing Description to be Displayed in Search Results ......................................................... 161 Submitting Site to Search Engines ............................................................................................ 161 Tracking Site Popularity 162 Enabling Statistics Count on Site .............................................................................................. 162 Viewing Site Visitors Statistics .................................................................................................. 163 Adding Visitors Counter to Site Pages ...................................................................................... 163 Publishing Site 164 Requirements to Host ................................................................................................................ 169 Appendix. Most Common Google Base Attributes 170
  • 5. Preface 5 Preface In this section: About Parallels Plesk Sitebuilder ....................................................................... 5 About This Guide............................................................................................... 6 Who Should Read This Guide ........................................................................... 7 Typographical Conventions ............................................................................... 7 Feedback .......................................................................................................... 8 About Parallels Plesk Sitebuilder Parallels Plesk Sitebuilder consists of two parts: the Wizard and the Administrator Panel. With Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard, you can create sites by simply choosing the design preset you like and adding text and images. Then you can add picture galleries, blogs and online stores in a few clicks. You do not need to know any markup or scripting languages to have a site. The Administrator Panel is a tool for managing and maintaining web sites created in the Wizard. In this section: What's New in This Version ............................................................................... 6
  • 6. 6 Preface What's New in This Version Plesk Sitebuilder 4.5 offers the following new features:  Site Map module. Allows you to display a clickable hierarchical model of your site structure to visitors  Removing design template from pages. You can now remove design template's layout and graphics from the desired pages.  External Page module. Allows you to link site menu items to external web sites.  Save button. A handy way to save changes you make while working on your site.  Counter settings are moved to the Wizard. You can now enable a counter on your site at the Pages step of the Wizard, which previously required going to the Administrator Panel.  Site visitor management is moved to the Wizard. You can now manage your registered visitors through the Registration module editor at the Edit step of the Wizard, which previously required going to the Administrator Panel.  Updated WYSIWYG editor to fix a series of issues. About This Guide This guide instructs you how to create and publish sites on the Internet using Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. This guide covers the following steps of creating and publishing your site: 1 Choosing the type of site to be created (see page 18) 2 Creating site design (see page 19) 3 Creating and editing site structure (see page 28) 4 Creating and editing site content (see page 39) 5 Publishing site on the Internet (see page 164)
  • 7. Preface 7 Who Should Read This Guide The target audience of this guide is regular users of Plesk Sitebuilder as well as guests, who are working with Plesk Sitebuilder in the guest mode, creating trial sites without publishing them on the Internet. Typographical Conventions Before you start using this guide, it is important to understand the documentation conventions used in it. The following kinds of formatting in the text identify special information. Formatting Type of information Example convention Special Bold Items you must select, Go to the Content tab. such as menu options, command buttons, or items in a list. Titles of chapters, sections, Read the Creating Site Design and subsections. chapter. Italics Used to emphasize the Block modules. These modules importance of a point, to do not require dedicated site introduce a term or to pages... designate a command line placeholder, which is to be replaced with a real name or value. Monospace URLs, names of Go to commands, files, and http://hostname/Wizard. directories. CAPITALS Names of keys on the SHIFT, CTRL, ALT keyboard. KEY+KEY Key combinations for CTRL+P, ALT+F4 which the user must press and hold down one key and then press another.
  • 8. 8 Preface Feedback If you have found a mistake in this guide, or if you have suggestions or ideas on how to improve this guide, please send your feedback using the online form at http://www.parallels.com/en/support/usersdoc/. Please include in your report the guide's title, chapter and section titles, and the fragment of text in which you have found an error.
  • 9. CHAPTER 1 Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard This chapter describes your first steps with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. In this chapter: Overview of Main Steps to Create Site .............................................................. 10 Logging In to Plesk Sitebuilder .......................................................................... 10 Learning Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard Interface ...................................................... 11 Starting to Work with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard .................................................. 16 Getting Help ...................................................................................................... 17
  • 10. 10 Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard Overview of Main Steps to Create Site As a rule, the process of creating a web site includes three main stages: planning, implementation, and web site updating or maintenance. Planning: The first and most essential stage in any project is planning. Before starting with Plesk Sitebuilder, think about the purpose of your web site and its target audience. After this, decide where your web site will be stored, or, in Internet terminology, hosted. This stage is beyond the scope of this document. Since Plesk Sitebuilder is often provided in a bundle with a web hosting package, we assume that you already have a web space for publishing your site. Then, you create a detailed structure of your future web site and prepare its contents, including text information and graphics. The planning stage is extremely important because it eventually determines the usefulness of your web site. Implementation: The next stage is the implementation of your web site. The five-step Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard takes you through the entire process of creating your site, from initial design to publishing and maintenance. The following is an overview of the main steps required to create a web site using Plesk Sitebuilder: 1 To create a web site, open Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. You can start working with the Wizard anonymously, without supplying login and password. 2 Complete the first four Wizard steps (choose the site type, select the design, create the site structure, add web site content including text, graphics and site modules and provide extra information for search engines). 3 Go to the Publish step and start the publishing process. If you do not have a Plesk Sitebuilder account and work with the program in demo mode, the site you create is temporary and cannot be published on the Internet until you register and buy hosting for your site. Once you are done with this, you can log in to Plesk Sitebuilder and assign your trial site to your account, thus making it possible to permanently publish your site on the Internet. Maintenance: When you complete the above steps, your site becomes available for visitors. It is critical to keep your site content fresh because this is a good way to show your attitude to customers and services. Therefore, we recommend to update your site on a regular basis. All you need to do is to log in to the Plesk Sitebuilder Administrator Panel, edit the site content in Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard, and click Publish. Sitebuilder will automatically transfer the updated content to your hosting location. For detailed instructions on what to do on every step of creating your site, see the chapters below. Logging In to Plesk Sitebuilder The Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard access procedure is different for different user roles. Below we describe the login process for site owners and anonymous users. The Plesk Sitebuilder administrator and resellers access Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard from their Administrator Panels.
  • 11. Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard 11  To log in to Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard using your site owner account: 1 Open your Internet browser. 2 Enter the URL you have received from your Plesk Sitebuilder provider into the address bar of your browser and press ENTER. For example, http://sitebuilder/login where 'sitebuilder' is the domain name of the server where Plesk Sitebuilder is installed. 3 Enter you user name and password, select the interface language and click Log in. If prior to gaining a Plesk Sitebuilder account you have created a trial site in Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard (on the same computer that you are logging in from), you will be prompted to assign the site to your account and thus upgrade it to regular. You can skip this step and register your trial site later, but note that it may be deleted by your Plesk Sitebuilder provider or automatically destroyed after the expiration date. Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard opens on the Start page, from which you can start creating your first site. You can proceed to your Administrator Panel by clicking the Go to Admin Panel shortcut at the top of the screen.  To access Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard as an anonymous user (in demo mode): 1 Open your Internet browser. 2 Enter the URL to Plesk Sitebuilder demo version into the address bar of your browser and press ENTER. For example, http://sitebuilder/Wizard where 'sitebuilder' is the domain name of the server where Plesk Sitebuilder is installed. The link may be distributed by a Plesk Sitebuilder provider, or obtained otherwise. 3 Select the language of Plesk Sitebuilder interface from the Interface language list. The Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard opens on the Overview page, which provides access to all five steps of the Wizard. Learning Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard Interface In Plesk Sitebuilder, a site is created in five steps. Each step has its own working and navigation principles, which will be covered in respective sections further in this guide. Here we will outline the general principles of working with the Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard interface, and enumerate elements present on all Plesk Sitebuilder screens.
  • 12. 12 Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard Figure 1: Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard Interface Every Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard window contains the following elements: 1 Plesk Sitebuilder logo linked to the Sitebuilder page on the official Parallels web site. This image can be customized by your Plesk Sitebuilder provider. 2 Save Changes button used for saving the results of actions performed on the page. If no changes have been applied, the button is inactive. This button is also disabled when editing the content of page modules on step Edit, since modules have their own dialogs for saving changes. 3 Top help string, which provides short instructions about the operations you can perform on the current page and displays the result of your last action. 4 Shortcuts used to switch between the five Wizard steps. The step you are currently on is highlighted in color. 5 Support button, which, by default, opens Plesk Sitebuilder Online Server Support screen on the official Parallels web site, where you can fill in the form to request the help of Parallels technical support team. This link can be customized by your Plesk Sitebuilder provider. 6 Help button opens the context-sensitive online help on the corresponding page. 7 Go to Admin Panel shortcut takes you to your Plesk Sitebuilder Administrator Panel. 8 Parallels logotype image linked to Parallels web site. 9 Log out button finishes your current session with Plesk Sitebuilder.
  • 13. Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard 13 Note: The Go to Admin Panel and Log out buttons are not displayed to anonymous users. Instead of the Log out button, they see a shortcut Already a registered user? Log in here.. 10 Work area, where the interface options available on the current step of the Wizard are displayed. 11 Back button, which enables you to get to the previous step of the Wizard (you can also return to the previous step using the top navigation bar). 12 Preview button, which allows you to preview the site at any stage of its creation. 13 Next button, which switches you to the next step of creating your site (you can also click the next tab in the top navigation bar). In this section: Working with Lists ..............................................................................................14
  • 14. 14 Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard Working with Lists When setting up page or block modules on the Edit step of Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard, you will see lists of various system objects (blog posts, online store orders, etc.). In such a list, each object record is a table row displaying the object name and the relevant parameters of the object (for example, for each forum topic, the author of the topic, the category the topic belongs to, the date of last the update, and the number of replies to the topic are displayed). Above and below each list, the total number of items contained in the list is displayed. Below the list, you can adjust the number of items to be displayed per page (5, 10, 25, or 100). In multi-page lists, you can navigate between the pages by clicking the page number shortcuts above and below the list. To go to the first/last page of the list, click First Page or Last Page, accordingly. In lengthy lists, you can find items using the search function, or sort items by certain parameters. To find an item, type a search criterion into the input box above the list, and click Search. The list will show the items matching the search criterion. To return to the full list of items, click Show All. Figure 2: Searching for Objects To sort list items by a certain parameter in ascending or descending order, click the parameter's title in the column heading. The order of sorting will be indicated by a small triangle displayed next to the parameter's title. Figure 3: Sorting Objects In some lists, you can filter items by a certain attribute by selecting one of them from the drop-down list (for example, on the Orders tab of your eShop page, you can filter out orders of certain status: New, Paid, Processed, Backorder, Completed, Cancelled, Failed, or Any). Figure 4: Filtering Objects
  • 15. Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard 15 Note: All the above described principles also apply to the list of design template categories on the Design step of the Wizard. For information on using these options on the Design step, read section Creating Site Design (on page 19). To choose a list object for further operation, select the check box to the left of the object's name. Figure 5: Selecting Particular Objects in a List To choose all objects in the list, select the check box at the head of the column. Figure 6: Selecting All List Objects at Once To perform operations with certain objects in a list, select the required objects and click an operation shortcut above the list (for example, Activate, Deactivate, Remove Selected, etc.). In the list of guestbook messages, the status of a message is indicated by icon in the Status (S) column (not archived or archived ). In most lists, individual operation shortcuts are displayed for each item. For example, for each product category on the Categories tab on the eShop page, there are arrows ( and ) used to change the order in which the categories are displayed on the site page; and the Edit icon used to open the categories in editing mode. In most lists, you can configure or edit a list object by:  Clicking the object name, if it is clickable (for example, the post names on the Content tab of the Blog page)  Clicking the Edit icon for this object in the list (for example, for a product on the Products tab of the eShop page) In some lists, you will also see shortcuts to managing the objects' dependent items - such as the View/Edit Comments shortcut for each blog post on the Content tab of the Blog page.
  • 16. 16 Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard In most object lists in the Wizard, you will find default objects created for your convenience, which you can delete or reuse at a later stage. Starting to Work with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard The Overview page provides quick access to and contains short description of each of the five steps required for creating a site in Plesk Sitebuilder. Figure 7: Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard Overview Page The five Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard steps are as follows: 1 Start. On this step, you choose whether to create a site from scratch or create a site using one of the proposed site templates (site-blog, site-photo gallery, etc.). 2 Design. On this step, you configure your site layout, color scheme, menu style, logo and banner, as well as set up text elements appeared at the background of your site, such as the title phrase and the copyright notice. 3 Pages. On this step, you configure the structure of your site and arrange the pages hierarchy in the site map. 4 Edit. On this step, you create and edit the content of your site pages. 5 Publish. On this step, you publish your site on the Internet. For anonymous users, on the Overview page, the Interface language box is displayed allowing to select the language of the Wizard interface.
  • 17. Getting Started with Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard 17 To start creating your site, click Start at the bottom of the screen. Getting Help If you encounter a problem while using Plesk Sitebuilder, there are several resources available to help you troubleshoot the problem:  Use on-screen context-sensitive help. At the bottom of the navigation pane, you can find short instructions on the operations that are available on the current page.  Refer to our knowledge base (http://kb.parallels.com/en/products/sitebuilderlinux). The knowledge base provides solutions to the most common problems with Plesk Sitebuilder.  Go to our forum (http://forum.swsoft.com/forumdisplay.php?s=f2b895fc3636e705ec9b9a85ef81f040 &forumid=99). Here all users can post questions, exchange ideas, and troubleshoot issues not described in the knowledge base. Note that Parallels does not provide official support through this forum.  Contact technical support. If you have any problems or questions that are not covered in the user documentation or knowledge base, you can click Support located on the navigation pane and submit your problem to your technical support representative.
  • 18. CHAPTER 2 Choosing Type of Created Site The first step of creating site with Plesk Sitebuilder is to choose whether you want to start creating your site from scratch or use one of proposed site templates (the so- called site families). By default, there are two site templates available - blog and image gallery, but the Plesk Sitebuilder administrator can extend this list by creating custom site templates and including them in your service plan. To choose the type of the created site, go to the Start step and click the required site family to select it. The Start page looks as follows: Figure 8: Step 1. Choosing the Site Type The chosen site family is indicated with the sign. Having selected a site family, click Next at the bottom of the screen to proceed to configuring the design of your site. If you fail to select a certain site family (and you see it in the list as grayed out), contact your Plesk Sitebuilder administrator for assistance.
  • 19. Creating Site Design 19 Creating Site Design In Plesk Sitebuilder, you can build the graphic design of your site by combining the provided presets with your custom design elements which you can upload to Sitebuilder. Plesk Sitebuilder offers design presets of several types, including: design templates, color schemes, page banners and site menu styles. You can personalize your design by uploading a custom page banner and logo. Besides uploading your own banner and logo, you can specify the title, subtitle and footer message for your site. In this chapter you will find a step-by-step instruction on creating your site design in Plesk Sitebuilder. The Plesk Sitebuilder Design step screen looks as follows. Figure 9: Step 2. Creating Site Design The work area of the screen contains the following elements: 1 Design template selection area, which provides the functions facilitating the choice of a site design template (see page 21). When you choose to display All categories, this area shows all available design templates.
  • 20. 20 Creating Site Design 2 Design template preview window displaying the currently selected template. Click this window for full-size preview of the template. The chosen design template, color scheme and menu style are shown in red frames in the corresponding areas of the screen. 3 Color schemes area, where you can choose the colors for your site (see page 23). 4 Banners area enabling you to select or upload a banner for your site (see page 23). 5 Menu styles area, where you can choose the appearance of the site menu (see page 24). 6 Logo area enabling you to upload your custom logo (see page 25). 7 Site info area where you can provide the information to be displayed in the header and footer of your site pages (see page 25). 8 The design template list navigation area. Read this chapter to learn how to use these options to create your site design. In this section: Selecting Design Template for Site ................................................................... 21 Removing Design Template from Page ............................................................. 22 Selecting Color Scheme .................................................................................... 23 Selecting Banner ............................................................................................... 23 Selecting Menu Style......................................................................................... 24 Uploading Logo ................................................................................................. 25 Specifying Site Title, Subtitle, and Footer Message ........................................... 25 Buying Pictures from Fotolia .............................................................................. 26
  • 21. Creating Site Design 21 Selecting Design Template for Site On this step, you choose the general graphic and layout concept of the site page - the site design template. For more convenience, design templates are grouped into categories which correspond to the most frequently encountered site types. Your choice of the design template defines the choice of available color schemes, menu styles and page banners further on this step. The list of available site design templates is determined by your service plan.  To select a design template for your site: 1 On the Design step, select a template category from the Category list. The default design template which goes with the category is displayed in the main design preview window; the alternative ones - in smaller windows beside the main window. 2 Click a design template to select it. The selected template appears in the main design preview window. By selecting a design template you can view the color schemes, menu styles and page banners which go with it in the respective areas of the page. Each design template has a unique alphanumeric code (for example, (vap-26, eug- 29, etc.) by which you can identify it in Plesk Sitebuilder. To choose a design template on pure aesthetic grounds (not by category), select All Categories from the Category list to display all available templates, and then click the desired template to select it. For some tips on working with the list of design templates, see section Working with Lists (on page 14). If necessary, you can remove the design template (see page 22) from selected standard (HTML) pages of your site at a later stage.
  • 22. 22 Creating Site Design Figure 10: Selecting a Design Template Removing Design Template from Page All pages of your Plesk Sitebuilder site are built on the basis of a design template - the one which you have applied on the Design step and which includes pre-configured page graphics and layout. You can remove these elements from any common (standard) page (indicated by the icon in the site map), turning it into a plain page with no design. To remove the design template from a page, go to the Edit step, select the page in the Site map area and click Remove Design Template. At any moment later you can get the page design back by clicking Restore Design Template. You cannot remove the design template from special pages (modules).
  • 23. Creating Site Design 23 Selecting Color Scheme For each design template, a number of color schemes are available. No custom color schemes can be uploaded to Plesk Sitebuilder. To select color scheme for your site, on the Design step, click the thumbnail image you like in the Color schemes section. The chosen color scheme is applied to the design template, and the results are displayed on the design template preview. Figure 11: Selecting a Color Scheme Selecting Banner In Plesk Sitebuilder, a banner is a large image of rectangular shape which serves as a central element of the page layout. Each design template offers a choice of available banners.  To select a banner: 1 On the Design step, in the Banners area, click the downward arrow to expand the list of available banners. 2 Select the banner you like. The chosen banner is displayed it in the main design preview window. You can also upload a custom banner for your site. The maximum allowed dimensions of a custom banner are 1024x350 px. The supported file formats are *.jpg, *.bmp, *.gif, *.png.
  • 24. 24 Creating Site Design  To upload a new banner: 1 On the Design step, click Browse in the Banners area. 2 In the Browse window, navigate to the image file you want to upload. 3 Click Open in the Browse window. 4 Click Upload in the Banners area. Figure 12: Selecting or Uploading a Banner Selecting Menu Style Menu style defines the visual appearance of the menu items on your site. To select the menu style, on the Design step, choose the preferable style in the Menu styles area. For each design template, there are a number of menu styles to choose from. Figure 13: Selecting a Menu Style
  • 25. Creating Site Design 25 Uploading Logo In Plesk Sitebuilder, a logo is a small image displayed at the top of each page, within the page banner. The maximum size of logo image is 320x320 px; the supported file formats are *.bmp, *.gif, *.jpg, *.png.  To upload a custom logo: 1 On the Design step, click Browse in the Logo area. 2 In the Browse window, navigate to the image file you want to upload. 3 Click Open in the Browse window. 4 Click Upload in the Logo area. For each template, Plesk Sitebuilder provides its own default logo image. To restore this logo, click Restore Default. To remove logo from your site design, click Clear. Figure 14: Uploading a Logo Specifying Site Title, Subtitle, and Footer Message Site title, subtitle, and footer message are text elements appeared at the background of your site: site title and subtitle are displayed within the site banner, and footer message is put at the bottom of every page of your site. To specify your site title, subtitle phrase and footer message, on the Design step, fill in the fields in the Site info section:
  • 26. 26 Creating Site Design  In the Site title field, provide your site name (maximum 255 characters). On business sites, this is usually a company name.  In the Subtitle field, provide any phrase which reflects the concept and objectives of the site. This phrase will be displayed below the site title in smaller font. On business sites, this is usually a corporate slogan.  In the Footer message field, provide the copyright notice or any other information of similar kind - disclaimers, contact information, etc., which you would like to place in the page footer. For each text element, it is possible to break the text into multiple lines. To do so, insert the <br> tag where you want the line break to be. For example: first line<br>second line<br>third line... If you do not wish to specify the title, subtitle or footer message for your site, clear the corresponding fields. Note: Some design templates allow customizing only the site title. For these templates, the Subtitle and Footer message fields are disabled. Figure 15: Specifying Site's Title, Subtitle, and Footer Message Buying Pictures from Fotolia In Plesk Sitebuilder, you can buy images from Fotolia (http://www.fotolia.com/parallels/) - the first worldwide social marketplace for royalty free stock images, directly from the Wizard. As a Parallels customer, you have a 20% bonus when purchasing Fotolia images.  To purchase images from Fotolia: 1 On the Design step, click the Buy pictures shortcut under the Color schemes area. 2 Follow the instructions provided on Fotolia web site to purchase images.
  • 27. Creating Site Design 27 Note: If you do not see this shortcut, it means that this option is disabled in the Plesk Sitebuilder license. Note that when filling your site with content on the Edit step, you can browse the Fotolia gallery and buy images directly from Plesk Sitebuilder (see Inserting Image (on page 55)). Figure 16: Buying Pictures from Fotolia
  • 28. CHAPTER 3 Creating Site Structure A site consists of several pages linked together to present information in an ordered way. Using Plesk Sitebuilder, you can arrange the pages in the two levels of hierarchy: top level pages and second level pages. Therefore, before this stage you must clearly understand how you intend to structure your site. Note: The maximum number of pages you can create in one site is determined by your service plan. To facilitate creating your site, you are provided with a number of pre-defined site structures, or page sets, which can be used as templates for creating your own site structure. The default page set of your site is determined by the type of site you chose on the Start page of Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. On the Pages step, you can build any possible site structure by adding the desired pages and arranging them as needed. Find out about the types of pages (see page 31) offered by Plesk Sitebuilder and about the process of building site structure (see page 32). The Pages step screen provides the following functionalities:
  • 29. Creating Site Structure 29 Figure 17: Step 3. Creating Site Structure 1 The Page sets area allows you to choose a page set. The selected page set is shown in red frame. 2 The Standard pages area displays the structure of the page set chosen in the Page sets area. You can expand or collapse this section by clicking the or icons in the top bar of the section. 3 The Your site structure area shows the final structure of your site. 4 The Page position area enables you to organize the hierarchy of pages (see page 33) in the site map, and to rename pages (see page 35). 5 and buttons allow you add or remove pages from the site structure. 6 The Site regional and language options area allows you to set the site language and the format of numeric data. You can expand or collapse this section by clicking the or icons. 7 The Special pages area displays all available types of pages which can be added to your site structure: one common text page, and all available page modules. You can expand or collapse this section by clicking the or icons. 8 The check box enabling you to add a visitors counter to your site (see page 163).
  • 30. 30 Creating Site Structure In this chapter: Types of Pages ................................................................................................. 31 Structuring Your Site ......................................................................................... 32 Choosing Site Language, Currency, and Format of Numbers, Time and Date... 37
  • 31. Creating Site Structure 31 Types of Pages In Plesk Sitebuilder, there are two types of pages:  Standard (common) pages - ordinary HTML pages used for displaying text information. Such pages are marked with icons in the site map.  Special pages - page modules which extend the site functionality. Each module is designed for a certain purpose and is identified by its own icon. There are the following types of page modules in Plesk Sitebuilder:  Blog (see page 73). Supports a standard set of blog functionality: posting, commenting, content categorizing, etc. A Blog page is very convenient for organizing the News, Events and similar pages on sites.  Image Gallery (see page 80). Allows you to share images or photos online. Supports batch image upload with group editing functions, organizing images into albums, etc.  eShop (see page 88). Online store creation and management tool featuring shopping cart, multi-currency, categorized product catalog with thumbnail upload capability, product inventory and shipping cost support, order management. Provides integration with a number of online payment systems, such as PayPal, Authorize.Net, and others.  File Download (see page 118). Allows providing content for download to site visitors. Note: Each File Download page can hold only one file. To provide several files for download, it is necessary to add several File Download pages to the site structure.  Flash Intro (see page 119). A pre-designed flash introduction to your site. It is possible to choose between several designs of the intro and insert your own text content into it. Note: The Flash Intro module is the only page module that requires no PHP on the publishing location and therefore can be included into a static site.  Forum (see page 120). Allows you to set up a forum where visitors can post questions and participate in discussions.  Guestbook (see page 128). Allows you to create a guestbook and manage the posted messages.  Registration (see page 132). Allows you to set up voluntary user authentication on sites. After a registered site visitor opts in, their details are automatically inputted in all forms they open on the site, for example, when submitting a forum topic or shopping at the online store. You can suspend a visitor account, thus restricting a visitor from authenticating under his or her user name.  External Page (see page 138). Allows incorporating links to external pages into the site menu. The list of available modules is determined by your service plan.
  • 32. 32 Creating Site Structure In Plesk Sitebuilder, you can add several page modules of one type to a site (except for Flash Intro and Registration). Structuring Your Site You can build and edit your site structure on the Pages step of Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. To facilitate creating your site, you are provided with a number of pre-defined site structures, or page sets, which can be used as templates for creating your own site structure. The default page set of your site is determined by the type of site you chose on the Start page of Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. You see this default page set highlighted in the list of page sets, its structure is displayed in the Your site structure box on the right. You can modify the proposed site structure as desired by adding pages from other page sets (or even whole page sets), renaming pages, changing pages hierarchy, or removing pages from the Your site structure box. The list of page sets available depends on your service plan and can be extended only by your Plesk Sitebuilder administrator. The structure of each page set is shown in the Standard pages area after you select the page set in the list. The Special pages area shows a list of special pages, or modules which you can add to your site, plus one common site page which you can use as an ordinary text page. To learn which modules are available, refer to Types of Pages (on page 31). In this section: Adding Pages .................................................................................................... 33 Changing Position of Pages .............................................................................. 33 Renaming Pages ............................................................................................... 35 Hiding Pages in Site Navigation ........................................................................ 35 Removing Pages ............................................................................................... 37
  • 33. Creating Site Structure 33 Adding Pages  To add pages to the site structure: 1 Select the necessary pages in the Standard pages, or in the Special pages area. Note: The module titles in the page set may differ from the original names of the modules. For example, a page Photo may represent the Image Gallery module. You can always identify a module by its icon. 2 Click . Or just drag and drop needed pages into the Your site structure box. You can add as many modules of one type to your site as you wish - except for the Flash Intro and Registration modules. These modules can be added to your site only once. Figure 18: Adding Pages Changing Position of Pages  To change the pages hierarchy: 1 Select the required page in the Your site structure box. 2 Use one of the buttons in the Page position area:  To move a page from the second level to the top level of the site structure, click Left.  To move a page from the top level to the second level, click Right.
  • 34. 34 Creating Site Structure  To move a page up at the same level, click Up.  To move a page down at the same level, click Down. When you move a first level page Up or Down, all dependent second level pages are moved together with it. Note: In Plesk Sitebuilder, modules can be only first-level pages in the site structure, and cannot have dependent second level pages. The only exception is the File Download module, which you can set a second-level page, but you cannot depend other pages on it. Figure 19: Changing Position of Pages
  • 35. Creating Site Structure 35 Renaming Pages  To rename a page: 1 Select the page in the Your site structure box and click Rename. Or just double-click the page's name to make it editable. 2 Provide a new name for the page. 3 Press ENTER. If you choose to rename the page at a later stage, you can use the Page title field on the Edit step of the Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. Figure 20: Renaming Pages Hiding Pages in Site Navigation You can make certain pages invisible in site menu. The page which you choose to hide will be accessible only by clicking a link placed on other pages of your site (or wherever you would like to place it). Note that when a site visitor actually accesses a hidden page, it appears in the site menu, and when they switch to another (not hidden) page, the hidden page disappears again. To hide a page in the site navigation menu: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 Go to the desired page. 3 Clear the Show this page in site map check box. Hidden pages are highlighted with grey color in the Site map area and in the site structure on the Pages step.
  • 36. 36 Creating Site Structure Figure 21: Hiding Pages in Site Navigation You can hide both first and second level pages. To understand how hiding pages correlates with pages hierarchy, see the example below: Let the site structure look as follows:  Page 1  Page 2 (hidden)  Page 3  Page 3.1 (hidden)  Page 3.2  Page 4 (hidden)  Page 4.1  Page 4.2 (hidden) To understand the dependency of pages' visibility and position in the hierarchy, see the table below. Active Page* Visible Pages Page 1 Page 1, Page 3 Page 2 Page 1, Page 2, Page 3 Page 3 Page 1, Page 3, Page 3.2 Page 3.1 Page 1, Page 3, Page 3.1, Page 3.2 Page 3.2 Page 1, Page 3, Page 3.2 Page 4 Page 1, Page 3, Page 4, Page 4.1 Page 4.1 Page 1, Page 3, Page 4.1 Page 4.2 Page 1, Page 3, Page 4.1, Page 4.2 * active page is a page where the site visitor currently stands
  • 37. Creating Site Structure 37 Removing Pages To remove a page from the site map, select the page in the Your site structure box and click . Note: You cannot delete all pages from the Your site structure area. In case you need to clear the space - for example, before setting up a completely new site structure, we recommend to select all pages, except one, delete them, add the necessary pages to the site, and then delete or reuse the old page. Figure 22: Removing Pages Choosing Site Language, Currency, and Format of Numbers, Time and Date In Plesk Sitebuilder, you can create a site in the language which is different from the language of your Wizard interface. The desired language is selected on the Pages step of Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. The choice of the language determines the format of numbers, the site currency and price format, and also the format of date and time records everywhere on your site.  To select the language for your site and the format of displaying numbers, currencies, times and dates: 1 Go to the Pages step. 2 Select the language of your site from the Interface language list.
  • 38. 38 Creating Site Structure In the Standards and formats area, you will see the format of numbers, date and time, and the currency associated with the chosen language. If you do not see a required language in the list, check Parallels web site (http://www.parallels.com/en/download/sitebuilder) to see if it is available. Only a user with administrator's privileges can download and install language packs in Plesk Sitebuilder. If you wish to use any of the available language packs, contact your Plesk Sitebuilder provider for assistance. Note that the currency and price format specified here will be applied to your online store, if you add one to your site. You can alter these settings for your online store at a later stage by configuring the eShop module accordingly (see page 100). The online store settings and the regional and language settings of the whole site are independent of each other. Figure 23: Choosing Site Language and Customizing Settings for Display of Numbers, Currencies, Time and Date
  • 39. CHAPTER 4 Populating Site with Content In Plesk Sitebuilder, creating your site content means creating the content of each HTML page constituting your site, and setting up functional modules you added to your site. You can do all this on the Edit step of Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. The Plesk Sitebuilder editor is organized in such a way that the information you type on the pages and the design of the pages are independent. Therefore, you can completely change the design for a page after you had typed a text on this page, without having to retype the information. The Edit step screen is structured in the following way: Figure 24: Step 4. Populating Site with Content
  • 40. 40 Populating Site with Content 1 Site map area shows the site structure created on the Pages step of the Wizard. By selecting a page in this area, you open its content for editing in the work area of the screen. To hide the Site map section, click the Hide Site Map icon. To restore the Site map area on the screen, click the Show Site Map icon. 2 Work area provides access to different functions, depending on the type of the edited page:  On ordinary text pages, the work area provides the space for creating the text content of the page (see page 41) and inserting images (see page 54) with the help of the WYSIWYG editor, like on the screenshot above.  On special pages, or page modules, the work area provides the module editor screen, where you can configure various parameters of the module on the respective tabs, and, in most cases, populate the module with content (for example, fill your online store catalog with products). For information on working with lists of objects on module management pages, read section Working with Lists (on page 14). For more information about configuring and editing each module, see respective sections further in this chapter. 3 Modules area allows to embed block modules in text pages, by drag-and-dropping the module icon to the required spot on the page. For some tips on using block modules, see section Working with Modules (on page 70). To hide the Modules section, click the Hide Modules icon. To restore the Modules area on the screen, click the Show Modules icon. Note: When you edit special pages (page modules), the Modules area of the screen is not displayed. In this chapter: Working with Text ..............................................................................................41 Working with Images..........................................................................................54 Working with Tables...........................................................................................62 Working with Modules ........................................................................................70
  • 41. Populating Site with Content 41 Working with Text Plesk Sitebuilder is empowered with a user-friendly WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) content editor, which enables you to see the content on the display screen exactly as it appears on the Internet. This subsection describes the ways of working with textual information on your web pages. You will learn how to format characters and paragraphs, cut, copy, paste text, insert images and links, check spelling, and more. Figure 25: Working with Text In this section: Applying Styles, Fonts, and Colors to Text ........................................................ 42 Formatting Paragraphs ...................................................................................... 42 Copying and Moving Text .................................................................................. 43 Finding and Replacing Text Fragments ............................................................. 44 Checking Spelling on Page ............................................................................... 45 Undoing and Redoing Actions ........................................................................... 45 Inserting Links ................................................................................................... 46
  • 42. 42 Populating Site with Content Applying Styles, Fonts, and Colors to Text  To apply formatting to a text: 1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page. 2 Select the text fragment you want to edit. You can select the whole text on the page by clicking Select All. 3 Apply desired formatting options to the selected text:  Select a font from the Font list.  Select a font size from the Size list.  Click the Text Color icon and select a color.  Click the Background Color icon and select a color.  Click the Bold, Italic, Underline, Strike Through icons to make the text bold, italic, underlined, or strikethrough respectively.  Click the Subscript or Superscript icon to make the text subscript or superscript respectively. 4 To insert a special symbol into the text, place the mouse cursor on the required spot on the page, click the Insert Special Character icon and select a symbol. To undo the last formatting action, click the Remove Format or Undo icon. Formatting Paragraphs  To apply formatting to a paragraph: 1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page. 2 Place the cursor anywhere in the paragraph you want to format. 3 Apply necessary formatting:  To apply a text style, select it from the Format list.  To align the text, click the Align Left, Center, Align Right, or Justify icon.  To change the indentation of the text, click the Increase Indent or Decrease Indent icon. 4 To insert a horizontal line between two paragraphs, place the cursor at the end of the first paragraph and click the Insert Horizontal Line icon.
  • 43. Populating Site with Content 43 5 To split a paragraph with a page break, click the Insert Page Break icon before the beginning of the new prospective paragraph. Copying and Moving Text  To copy or move text: 1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page. 2 Select a text fragment. You can select the whole text of the page by clicking the Select All icon. 3 Click the Cut or Copy, icon depending on the type of operation (moving or copying). 4 Paste the text on the page using one of the three pasting options:  To simply paste the text from the current page, or from other pages of the site, place the cursor in the appropriate spot on the page and click the Paste icon.  To paste the text from MS Word, and to retain the formatting applied to it, click the Paste from Word icon, paste the text into the provided window, and click OK.  To paste the text, and to discard all formatting applied to it, click the Paste as Plain Text icon, paste the text into the provided window, and click OK.
  • 44. 44 Populating Site with Content Finding and Replacing Text Fragments  To find a particular text fragment on the page: 1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page. 2 Click the Find icon. 3 In the Find what field, enter the text you want to find. 4 Select the Match case check box to search only for text that exactly matches the case (uppercase or lowercase character formatting) of the specified search pattern. 5 Click Find to start the search.  To find and replace a text fragment on the page: 1 Click the Replace icon. 2 In the Find what field, enter the text you want to find. 3 In the Replace with field, enter the text to replace the searched fragment with. 4 Select the necessary search options:  Match case - to search for text that exactly matches the case (uppercase or lowercase character formatting) for the specified search pattern.  Match whole words - to search for the exact phrase as it is specified. 5 Click Replace to replace a particular found segment. 6 Click Replace All to replace all segments found on the page without reviewing them.
  • 45. Populating Site with Content 45 Checking Spelling on Page The Spell Checker feature can be used only with Internet Explorer version 5.5 or later. To be able to use the Spell Checker, you need to install ieSpell - a free-of-charge spell checker utility for Internet Explorer. To install ieSpell, download the application setup package from the official ieSpell web site (http://www.iespell.com/download.php), run it on your computer and complete the steps of the installation procedure as described, then restart Internet Explorer. The Spell Checker is available for English only.  To check spelling on the page: 1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page. 2 Click the Check Spell icon. In the Not in dictionary field, possible spelling mistakes are shown. 3 If you are sure that the word found by the Spell Checker is not misspelled, click Ignore to leave the word as is. To ignore all occurrences of this word in the text, click Ignore All. 4 If you wish to add this word to the Spell Checker dictionary, click Add. 5 If you want to replace the misspelled word with the word in the Suggestions field, click Change. To replace this word in the whole text, click Change All. 6 If you wish to configure the Spell Checker parameters, click Options. Undoing and Redoing Actions To undo the last action, click Undo. To redo the last undone action, click Redo.
  • 46. 46 Populating Site with Content Inserting Links Using the Plesk Sitebuilder editor, you can insert both internal links leading to other pages of your site, and external links. Internal links point to other pages of your site. External links pointing to other sites are often used to improve your site popularity and will direct visitors of your site to friendly sites (the so-called link exchange). With the help of Plesk Sitebuilder link manager, you can add the following types of links:  External links (see page 47)  Internal links, or links to other pages of your site (see page 50)  Anchors (see page 50)  E-mail links (see page 52) To edit a link, right-click the selected link and click Edit Link. To remove a link, right-click the selected link and click Remove Link, or select the link text and click the Remove Link icon on the editor panel. In this section: Inserting External Link ....................................................................................... 47 Inserting Internal Link ........................................................................................ 50 Inserting Anchor ................................................................................................ 50 Inserting E-Mail Link .......................................................................................... 52
  • 47. Populating Site with Content 47 Inserting External Link An external link is a reference in a hypertext document to another document on a different web site.  To insert an external link: 1 Type/Select the text which you want to set as a hyperlink to another web resource. 2 Click the Insert/Edit Link icon. Figure 26: Inserting an External Link 3 On the Link Info tab, select URL from the Link type list. 4 Select the protocol from the Protocol list. The available selections are:  http://  https://  ftp://  news://  <other> 5 In the URL field, enter the web address to which the link will point. 6 On the Target tab, select the way the link should open from the Target list:  To open the link in same browser window (the target page replaces the page of your site), leave the Target option in its default value <not set>, and leave the Target Frame Name field blank.
  • 48. 48 Populating Site with Content  To open the link in the new browser window, select New Window [_blank] from the Target list.  To open the link as a pop-up window, select <popup window> from the Target list, and specify the parameters of the pop-up in the Popup Window Features area below. Note: Other options in the Target list have been designed to work with the HTML Frames technology, which is currently not used on Plesk Sitebuilder sites. On non-frames sites, all these options open the link in the same window. 7 If you wish to specify additional attributes for the link, enter them on the Advanced tab: Id, this attribute assigns a name to the link. This name must be unique on the page. Language Direction, this attribute specifies the base direction of directionally neutral text. Direction can be Left-to-right or Right-to-left. Access Key, this attribute assigns an access key to an element. An access key is a single character from the document character set. Name, this attribute names the current link as an anchor, so that it may be the destination of another link. The value of this attribute must be a unique anchor name within the current page. Language Code, this attribute specifies the base language of the link's attribute values and text content. Tab Index, this attribute specifies the position of the current element in the tabbing order for the current document. The tabbing order defines the order in which elements receive focus when navigated by the user via the keyboard. The tabbing order may include elements nested within other elements. Advisory Title, this attribute offers advisory information about the link. The information is displayed in the status bar of the browser when the mouse hovers over the link. Advisory Content Type, this attribute gives an advisory hint as to the content type of the content available at the link target address. It allows user agents to opt to use a fallback mechanism rather than fetch the content if they are advised that they will get content in a content type they do not support. Stylesheet Classes, this attribute assigns a CSS class name or set of class names to the link. Linked Resource Charset, this attribute specifies the character encoding of the resource designated by the link. Style, this attribute specifies style information for the current link. The information should be formatted as follows: Content-Style-Type: text/css. 8 Click OK. You can also provide a link to an image, document or a media file stored on your computer.  To provide a link to a file on your computer: 1 Type/Select the text which you want to set as a hyperlink. 2 Click the Insert/Edit Link icon.
  • 49. Populating Site with Content 49 3 On the Link Info tab, select URL from the Link type list. 4 Select <other> from the Protocol check box. 5 Click Browse Server. 6 In the file uploading window, select the type of file from the Resource type box: File, Image, Flash, or Media. Inside each resource type, you can organize your files into a number of folders. To do so, create the desired hierarchy of folders prior to uploading the files. To create a folder in the root directory, click Add New Folder in the bottom part of the screen. Having created a folder, click its name to open it. You can create a new folder inside the opened folder, or upload a file to it. When the folder is opened, the top bar of the file uploading screen shows the path to this folder on the server, and the left frame provides navigation to the upper-level folder. To navigate one level up, click the .. icon. 7 To upload a file of the selected type to the server, click Browse, locate the file in your local file system, click Open and then click Upload. For each uploaded file, size is shown. To delete a file, click the corresponding icon. 8 To create a link to the file, click the file name. Figure 27: Inserting a Link to a File The path to the file on the server is automatically inputted into the URL field on the Link screen. 9 Click OK.
  • 50. 50 Populating Site with Content Inserting Internal Link An internal link is a link to another page of your site.  To insert an internal link: 1 Type/Select the text which you want to set as a link to another page. 2 From the Custom links box on the WYSIWYG panel, select the page to which the link should point. Figure 28: Inserting a Link to Another Page of Your Site Inserting Anchor Anchor is a word or a group of words that define the destination a hyperlink leads to. Anchors are very helpful in facilitating navigation through a great amount of text located on a single place. With this function you can provide the site visitors an easy way to jump from one part of the text to another.  To insert an anchor: 1 Place the cursor where you want the link to lead to. 2 Click the Insert/Edit Anchor icon. 3 On the Anchor Properties form, enter the anchor name. Figure 29: Inserting an Anchor
  • 51. Populating Site with Content 51 4 Click OK. The anchor icon appears in the selected place in the text. 5 Select a text fragment which you want to link to the anchor to. 6 Click the Insert/Edit Link icon. 7 On the Link Info tab, select Anchor in this page from the Link type list. Select an anchor from the list. Figure 30: Creating a Link to the Anchor 8 If you wish to specify additional attributes for the anchor, enter them on the Advanced tab: Id, this attribute assigns a name to the anchor. This name must be unique on the page. Language Direction, this attribute specifies the base direction of directionally neutral text. Direction can be Left-to-right or Right-to-left. Access Key, this attribute assigns an access key to an element. An access key is a single character from the document character set. Name, this attribute names the current link as an anchor, so that it may be the destination of another link. The value of this attribute must be a unique anchor name within the current page. Language Code, this attribute specifies the base language of the anchor's attribute values and text content. Tab Index, this attribute specifies the position of the current element in the tabbing order for the current document. The tabbing order defines the order in which elements receive focus when navigated by the user via the keyboard. The tabbing order may include elements nested within other elements.
  • 52. 52 Populating Site with Content Advisory Title, this attribute offers advisory information about the anchor. The information is displayed in the status bar of the browser when the mouse hovers over an anchor. Advisory Content Type, this attribute gives an advisory hint as to the content type of the content available at the link target address. It allows user agents to opt to use a fallback mechanism rather than fetch the content if they are advised that they will get content in a content type they do not support. Stylesheet Classes, this attribute assigns a CSS class name or set of class names to the anchor. Linked Resource Charset, this attribute specifies the character encoding of the resource designated by the link. Style, this attribute specifies style information for the current anchor. The information should be formatted as follows: Content-Style-Type: text/css. 9 Click OK. To remove a link to the anchor, select the link text and click the Remove Link icon. To remove an anchor itself, select it on the page and click the DELETE key. Inserting E-Mail Link If you want visitors of your site to contact you by e-mail, insert an e-mail link into your web page. On a web page, this looks like your e-mail address underlined, and when a user clicks it, a mail program on his or her computer opens a "Compose New Message" window with your e-mail address specified as the recipient address. When placing e-mail links, you can also specify the default subject for the message.  To insert an e-mail link: 1 Select a text which you want to set as an e-mail link. 2 Click the Insert/Edit Link icon. 3 On the Link Info tab, select E-mail from the Link type list. 4 Enter an e-mail address in the E-mail address field. 5 In the Message subject field, enter the default subject of the message. 6 In the Message body field, enter the default text of the message.
  • 53. Populating Site with Content 53 Figure 31: Inserting an E-Mail Link 7 If you want to specify additional attributed for the link, you can do it on the Advanced tab. Id, this attribute assigns a name to the link. This name must be unique on the page. Language Direction, this attribute specifies the base direction of directionally neutral text. Direction can be Left-to-right or Right-to-left. Access Key, this attribute assigns an access key to an element. An access key is a single character from the document character set. Name, this attribute names the current link as an anchor, so that it may be the destination of another link. The value of this attribute must be a unique anchor name within the current page. Language Code, this attribute specifies the base language of the link's attribute values and text content. Tab Index, this attribute specifies the position of the current element in the tabbing order for the current document. The tabbing order defines the order in which elements receive focus when navigated by the user via the keyboard. The tabbing order may include elements nested within other elements. Advisory Title, this attribute offers advisory information about the link. The information is displayed in the status bar of the browser when the mouse hovers over the link. Advisory Content Type, this attribute gives an advisory hint as to the content type of the content available at the link target address. It allows user agents to opt to use a fallback mechanism rather than fetch the content if they are advised that they will get content in a content type they do not support. Stylesheet Classes, this attribute assigns a CSS class name or set of class names to the link. Linked Resource Charset, this attribute specifies the character encoding of the resource designated by the link.
  • 54. 54 Populating Site with Content Style, this attribute specifies style information for the current link. The information should be formatted as follows: Content-Style-Type: text/css. 8 Click OK. Working with Images The Plesk Sitebuilder WYSIWYG editor allows you to insert images into the pages of your site, and to adjust their properties as desired: resize, crop, set alignment, spacing, add borders, specify meta information and configure advanced image settings, such as long description and CSS styles. You can insert images from your computer, or buy and upload professional images from Fotolia (http://www.fotolia.com/parallels/) - the first worldwide social marketplace for royalty free stock images. You can browse the Fotolia gallery, purchase and upload any image of your choice directly from Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. As a Parallels customer, you have a 20% bonus when purchasing Fotolia images. In this section: Inserting Image ................................................................................................. 55 Editing Image .................................................................................................... 59 Removing Image ............................................................................................... 61
  • 55. Populating Site with Content 55 Inserting Image  To insert an image: 1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page. 2 Place the mouse cursor where you want to insert an image. 3 Click the Insert/Edit Image icon. 4 On the Image Info tab, click Browse Server. Figure 32: Inserting an Image 5 Click Browse and select an image to upload. Note: The maximum size of the image is 200KB. The supported graphics file formats are *.gif, *.jpg, *.jpeg, *.png, *.bmp. 6 Click Open, then click Upload. When inserting an image, only the Image file type is available in the Resource type list. For each uploaded image, size is shown. If you plan to upload many images to the server, you can organize them in a number of folders on the file uploading screen. To do so, you need to create the desired hierarchy of folders prior to uploading the files. To create a folder in the root directory, click Add New Folder in the bottom part of the screen and provide the folder name on the pop-up window that appears. Having created a folder, click its name to open it. You can create a new folder inside the opened folder, or upload a file to it.
  • 56. 56 Populating Site with Content When the folder is opened, the top bar of the file uploading screen shows the path to this folder on the server, and the left frame provides navigation to the upper-level folder. To navigate one level up, click the .. icon. To delete an image, click the corresponding icon. 7 To insert an image into the page, click the image file name. Figure 33: Uploading an Image to the Server The image appears in the preview area of the Image Properties dialog; the image dimensions appear automatically in the corresponding fields. The path to the image on the server is placed in the URL field. 8 Click OK. You can also buy and upload professional images from the Fotolia (http://www.fotolia.com/parallels/) stock images marketplace.  To buy an image from the Fotolia gallery and insert it into a page: 1 On the Edit step, select the desired site page. 2 Place the mouse cursor where you want to insert an image. 3 Click the Insert/Edit Image icon. 4 On the Image Info tab, click Browse the Fotolia gallery. 5 Browse the gallery and click on the image of your choice. For your convenience, images are arranged in categories and subcategories, by the depicted subject (displayed on the Representative Categories tab), or by the idea they express (on the Conceptual Categories tab). To view the category of interest, click its name on either of the tabs. At the top of the page you can see the path to the category or subcategory in both groups of categories (on both tabs).
  • 57. Populating Site with Content 57 You can also search for images by keywords or ID (if you know the ID of the image in the Fotolia gallery) using the Search for option at the top of the window. When you hover your mouse over an image, detailed information about it is displayed, including the image ID, short description, author, the lowest available price, and path on both tabs. After you click on the image, it is highlighted in red. Figure 34: Selecting an Image in the Fotolia Gallery 6 Click OK. 7 To purchase the image, click the Proceed to buying this image shortcut in the upper part of the window. Images not purchased from Fotolia are not displayed on the published site. 8 In the License column of the table, select the preferred dimensions and resolution option for the image. For each license, price in credits is displayed (1 credit = $1.00). 9 Click Next. 10 If you do not have a Fotolia account yet, click Register Now and complete the registration procedure on the Fotolia web site. After activating your account on the Fotolia web site, you can buy a number of credits right away. You can pay for credits via your credit card, PayPal or Click & Buy. Having registered an account and bought some credits, return to Plesk Sitebuilder to purchase the desired image. 11 On the login and registration window, input your account credentials and click Log In. In the User info section, you see the number of credits you have on your account. In the Image info section, you see the image preview, details and price.
  • 58. 58 Populating Site with Content If you do not have enough credits for buying the image, click the Buy more credits shortcut and purchase credits on the Fotolia web site, or click Back to return to the previous screen and choose a cheaper license. 12 Click Purchase Now. 13 On the confirmation screen, click Close.
  • 59. Populating Site with Content 59 Editing Image  To edit image size, alignment, spacing, border, alternate text, target URL, or advanced settings: 1 Right-click on the image. 2 Choose Image Properties from the context menu. 3 To provide an alternate text for the image, enter it in the Alternate text field. This text replaces the image in conditions when it cannot be rendered normally - when users' browsers are configured not to display images, or when the page is visited by visually impaired users (the ones who use speech synthesizers). Specifying this attribute is considered a requirement for most web resources. In some browsers (for example, in Internet Explorer) the alternate text is displayed when the mouse hovers over an image. 4 To resize the image, specify the image dimensions in the Width and Height fields. To reset the image size to its original one, click the Reset Size icon. When resizing an image, you can choose whether to keep the proportions of the original image or change the image width and height separately. To do so, use the Lock aspect ratio icon. The Preview window shows the image appearance after the resize. 5 To draw a border around the image, specify a desired border width in pixels in the Border width field. To set the color of the border, go to the Advanced tab and enter the color in the Style field, in CSS style format (for example, color: black). 6 To set the width of white space to be inserted to the left and right of the image, specify a desired value in pixels in the Horizontal spacing field. 7 To set the width of white space to be inserted above and below the image, specify a desired value in pixels in the Vertical spacing field. 8 To align the image on the page and set the desired word wrap type, choose the appropriate option from the Align list. 9 On the Link tab, in the URL field, specify the link where the image will point. To point an image to a file on your computer, click Browse Server and upload a file as described in Inserting External Link (on page 47). 10 From the Target list, choose the way the link should open:  To open the link in same browser window, leave the Target option in its default value <not set>.  To open the link in the new browser window, select New window [_blank] from the Target list.
  • 60. 60 Populating Site with Content Note: Other options in the Target list have been designed to work with the HTML Frames technology, which is currently not used on Plesk Sitebuilder sites. On non-frames sites, all these options open the link in the same window. 11 If you wish to specify additional attributes for the image, enter them on the Advanced tab: ID, this attribute assigns a name to the object element, which can be used, for example, as a target anchor for a hyperlink. This ID must be unique on the page. Text Direction, specifies the base direction of directionally neutral text. Direction can be Left to right or Right to left. Language Code, this attribute specifies the ISO code of the natural language in which the image meta information is provided. This improves your image rendering by search engines and helps visually impaired users. You can provide the language code in the following formats:  As an ISO 639 two-letter abbreviation (en (English), fr (French), de (German), it (Italian)); the full list of such abbreviations is available here (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes).  As a combination of the ISO 639 language code and a two-letter ISO 3166 country code (for example, en-US). The full list of ISO 3166 two-letter codes can be found here (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_3166-1). Long Description URL, this attribute specifies a link to the image long description, which opens upon clicking on the alternate text. Stylesheet Classes, this attribute assigns a CSS class name or set of class names to the image. Advisory Title, this attribute offers advisory information about the image. The information is displayed on a tool tip which appears when the mouse hovers over the image. If you leave this field blank, in Internet Explorer, the tool tip contains the image alternate text. In Mozilla Firefox, the tool tip is not displayed. Style, this attribute specifies style information for the current image. The information should be formatted as follows: Content-Style-Type: text/css. 12 Click OK.  To crop an image: 1 Click on the image and then click Crop on the WYSIWYG editor toolbar. Or, right-click on the image and choose Crop Image from the context menu. 2 In the crop window, with your mouse, drag the borders of the crop area where desired using the resize handles at the sides.
  • 61. Populating Site with Content 61 Figure 35: Cropping the Image To move the crop area use the move handle which appears when you hover your mouse over the crop area. When your are setting the crop area using the mouse cursor, you can see the size of the resulting image and the size of the cropped areas on the left of the window. You can adjust the sizes by specifying certain number of pixels in the corresponding fields:  To set the width of the area to be cropped from the left or right of the image, specify a desired number of pixels in the Left crop band size field. To crop from the right, specify a negative number.  To set the width of the area to be cropped from the top or bottom of the image, specify a desired number of pixels in the Top crop band size field. To crop from the bottom, specify a negative number. To adjust the dimensions of the resulting image, specify the desired width and height in the Output image width and Output image height fields. 3 If you wish to keep the original image proportions after cropping, select the Lock aspect ratio check box. 4 Click OK. Note: The resize and crop operations are applied to the copy of the image. If you wish to restore the original image, reload it from the server (right-click on the cropped image > Image Properties > Browse Server > click the corresponding image file > OK).
  • 62. 62 Populating Site with Content Removing Image To remove an image from the page, click on it and then press DELETE on your keyboard. Working with Tables Tables are used to organize textual and numerical information in a convenient and clear way. Besides, on web pages, tables are often used as a convenient tool for building page layout. When you build your page on the basis of a table, you:  Have more freedom in positioning elements on a web page  Ensure that organized text is displayed correctly in all browsers and screen resolutions With table-based layout you may, for example, incorporate an RSS feed into your page as a side frame, by drag-and-dropping the RSS module as described in section Adding RSS News Feeds (on page 148), into one of the table columns. The current section describes how to work with tables: insert tables, add and delete rows, columns, and cells, merge and split cells, and resize tables and cells. In this section: Inserting Table .................................................................................................. 63 Editing Table Properties .................................................................................... 64 Adding or Removing Rows, Columns, and Cells ............................................... 65 Editing Cell Properties ....................................................................................... 67 Merging Cells .................................................................................................... 67 Spanning Cell across Several Rows or Columns ............................................... 68 Splitting Cell ...................................................................................................... 69 Adding Content to Table .................................................................................... 69 Removing Table ................................................................................................ 70
  • 63. Populating Site with Content 63 Inserting Table  To insert a table: 1 Place the cursor where you want to insert a table. 2 Click the Insert/Edit Table icon on the WYSIWYG editor toolbar. 3 Specify the number of columns and rows in the table. 4 Specify the table width and height. In the Width field, enter the desired table width in pixels. The default value is 200 px. We do not recommend creating tables wider than 760 pixels, so that your table is displayed correctly in all screen resolutions. Note: Some site design templates do not allow inserting tables wider than 450 px, or even 280 px. In such templates, inserting wider tables causes odd look of the page on preview. If inserting a wider table is critical for you, go to the Design step of the Wizard and choose a different site design template. In the Height field, specify the table height in pixels. If you leave this field blank, the value is set automatically based on the number of rows. The default row height is 20 px. 5 In Border size field, specify the size of the table border in pixels. The default value is 1 px. Note: To make the borders invisible, specify "0" in the Border size field. You may need this option if you are using a table for page layouting purposes. 6 Select the alignment type (Left, Center, or Right). By default, the table is left aligned. 7 Specify cell spacing and padding.  Cell spacing is the distance between the cells. The default value is 1 px.  Cell padding is the distance between the border of the cell and the text contained in the sell. The default value is 1 px. 8 Optionally, enter the table caption and description (summary).  The table caption is displayed on the site page above the table (center aligned). By default, the caption is given in the same font as all other text information on the page.  The table description (summary) is not shown on the site page - your users will see it in a pop-up window after they right-click on the table and choose Properties from the context menu. To see how it works, open the site preview. The Properties option is displayed only for tables which have a description (summary) specified. 9 Click OK. 10 Click Save on the WYSIWYG editor toolbar.
  • 64. 64 Populating Site with Content Figure 36: Inserting a Table Editing Table Properties  To edit the table properties: 1 Right-click inside the table and choose Table Properties from the context menu. 2 In the Table Properties dialog , you can set the following properties:  Width. You can specify the new value in pixels, or as a percent from the original width.  Height. Specify the new value in pixels.  Cell spacing and Cell padding.  Alignment.  Border size.  Table Caption and Summary. For detailed information about setting these parameters, refer to section Inserting Table (on page 63). Note: You cannot edit the number of rows and columns in this dialog. Learn how to change the number of rows and columns in section Adding or Removing Rows, Columns and Cells (on page 65). 3 Click OK. Alternatively, you can resize the table horizontally or vertically (edit table width, or height, or both) with your mouse. To do so, click one of the table's resize handles and, holding down your mouse, drag the border to the location you prefer.
  • 65. Populating Site with Content 65 Figure 37: Resizing a Table with the Mouse Cursor Adding or Removing Rows, Columns, and Cells  To add a row or a column: 1 Place your mouse cursor in one of the table cells. 2 Right-click on the cell and choose the necessary operation from the context menu:  To insert a row below the current row (containing a cursor), choose Insert Row.  To insert a column to the right from the current column, choose Insert Column. Note: When you add a row or column to the table, the table is not resized to accommodate them. Instead, other columns and rows present in the table are resized to fit into the specified table width or height. If you wish to preserve the original column and row properties, resize the table prior to adding a new column or row. For information on table resizing, refer to Editing Table Properties (on page 64).  To insert a cell to the right from the current cell, choose Insert Cell. The cell is added in the current row, immediately to the right from the highlighted cell. Other cells in the row are shifted right.  To remove a row, column, or cell: 1 Place your mouse cursor in the cell you wish to delete. 2 Right-click on the highlighted cell. Depending on the operation you wish to perform, select Delete Rows, Delete Columns, or Delete Cells from the context menu. After you delete a column or row, other columns and rows are resized to fill the space. After you delete a cell, other cells in the row are shifted left. In some web browsers, the table cell containing a cursor will be marked with quick operation shortcuts - two small arrows and a circle . You can use these shortcuts to edit your table in the following way:  To insert a row below the current row, click the downward pointing arrow. When you hover your mouse over the arrow, the arrow's color is changed to red .  To insert a row above, click the upward pointing arrow .
  • 66. 66 Populating Site with Content  To insert a column to the left, click the arrow pointing left .  To insert a column to the right, click the arrow pointing right .  To remove the current column, click the circle between the arrows on the top border of the highlighted cell .  To remove the current row, click the same circle on the left border of the highlighted cell .
  • 67. Populating Site with Content 67 Editing Cell Properties  To configure the parameters of a cell: 1 Place your mouse cursor in the desired cell. 2 Right-click on the cell and select Cell Properties from the context menu. 3 On the Cell Properties tab, you can set the following properties:  Width/Height. Specify the width (in pixels, or percent from the original one) and height (in pixels) of the selected cell. Note: A cell is resized together with the row or column containing it.  The content positioning options:  Word Wrap. When word wrap is enabled (the default option), a word which exceeds the cell width is automatically moved to the next line within the cell.  Vertical Alignment/Horizontal Alignment. Choose one of the provided options for horizontal (Left, Right, or Center) and vertical alignment (Top, Middle, Bottom, or Baseline). By default, the content is left and top aligned.  Color options:  Background Color.  Border Color. To set the color, click Select, choose the desired color from one of the provided palettes and click OK. 4 Click OK. Figure 38: Editing Cell Properties
  • 68. 68 Populating Site with Content Merging Cells Sometimes, you may need to unify several rows or columns with a single horizontal or vertical cell containing information common for these cells. To do this, you can either span one cell across several rows or columns, or merge several cells into one (horizontally or vertically). The difference between these two options is as follows:  When you merge cells, they are united in a single cell. The content of the cells is merged as well.  When you span a cell across several rows or columns, the cell is stretched, and shifts other cells together with their content to the right (when you span a row), or downwards (when you span a column).  To merge cells: 1 Select the cells you wish to merge. To select the cells, left-click your mouse on the first cell you wish to merge and, holding down your mouse, drag it over other required cells. Alternatively, you can place your mouse cursor in the far right cell to be merged and press SHIFT + <- (left arrow) on your keyboard to select other required cells. The selected cells are highlighted in color. 2 Right-click on the table and choose Merge Cells. For details on spanning cells, refer to section Spanning Cell across Several Rows or Columns (on page 68). Spanning Cell across Several Rows or Columns Sometimes, you may need to unify several rows or columns by a single horizontal or vertical cell containing information common for these cells. To do this, you can either span a cell across several rows or columns, or merge several cells into one (horizontally or vertically). The difference between these two options is as follows:  When you merge cells, they are just united in a single cell. The content of the cells is merged as well.  When you span a cell across several rows or columns, the cell is stretched, and shifts other cells, together with their content, to the right (when you span a row), or downwards (when you span a column).  To span a cell across several rows or columns: 1 Place your mouse cursor in the desired cell. 2 Right-click on the table and select Cell Properties from the context menu. 3 On the Cell Properties tab:  To span a cell across several rows, specify the number of rows in the Rows Span field.
  • 69. Populating Site with Content 69  To span a cell across several columns, specify the number of columns in the Columns Span field. Figure 39: Spanning a Cell across Several Rows or Columns For details on cells merging, refer to section Merging Cells (on page 67). Splitting Cell  To split a cell (horizontally): 1 Place your mouse cursor in the cell you wish to split. 2 Right-click on the table and choose Split Cell from the context menu. Later you can adjust the width of the new cells according to the instructions provided in section Editing Cell Properties (on page 67). Adding Content to Table Tables are often used for building web page layouts. When building your page on the basis of a table, you:  Have more freedom in positioning elements on a web page  Ensure that organized text is displayed correctly in all browsers and screen resolutions Note: If you wish to use tables for organizing your content, set the table Border Width parameter to 0. For details on setting table parameters, refer to Inserting Table (on page 63). Plesk Sitebuilder allows you to add all types of content to tables, including text, images, and block modules.  To insert text in a table: 1 Place your mouse cursor in the desired table cell.
  • 70. 70 Populating Site with Content 2 Enter your text. You can either  Type in your text (see Working with Text (on page 41) for instructions on performing various formatting and other operations with the text) or  Paste it from the clipboard by right-clicking on the cell and choosing Paste from the content menu, or by using the keyboard shortcut (CTRL+V) The table cell is resized to accommodate the text. If necessary, you can enable or disable the word wrap function; you can also set the text alignment in the cell. Refer to Editing Cell Properties (on page 67) for details on both these operations.  To insert an image in a table: 1 Place your mouse cursor in the desired table cell. 2 Insert the image as described in section Inserting Image (see page 55). The table cell is resized to accommodate the image. To insert a block module, click on the desired block module in the Modules section of the Edit page and, keeping down your mouse, drag it to the required table cell. For information on further modules setup, refer to Working with Modules (on page 70). Removing Table To remove a table from the page, right-click it and select Delete Table from the context menu. Working with Modules There are two types of modules you can configure in Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard:  Page modules, or special pages. These modules are added to your site as separate web pages on the Pages step of the Wizard. There are the following special pages in Plesk Sitebuilder:  Blog (see page 73)  Image Gallery (see page 80)  eShop (see page 88)  File Download (see page 118)  Flash Intro (see page 119)  Forum (see page 120)  Guestbook (see page 128)  Registration (see page 132)  External Page (see page 138)
  • 71. Populating Site with Content 71 All page modules available in Plesk Sitebuilder are described in section Types of Pages (on page 31). For instructions on how to include special pages in your site structure, see section Structuring Your Site (on page 32).  Block modules. These modules do not require dedicated site pages: they are inserted into ordinary HTML pages, and work as embedded functional blocks. There are the following block modules in Plesk Sitebuilder:  Area Map (see page 138). Allows you to insert fragments of geographical maps into site pages. You can choose between two third-party GIS engines: Google Maps API and Microsoft MapPoint Web Service.  Feedback (see page 143). Allows you to include a feedback form into the page.  RSS Reader (see page 148). Allows you to automatically load favorite news and information to you site from RSS news feeds (also called "channels").  Script (see page 150). Allows you to add custom PHP, Perl/CGI, JavaScript, DHTML or any other code to your web pages.  Voting (see page 152). Allows conducting polls and online surveys.  Online Status Indicator (see page 154). Allows you to place an icon showing your ICQ or Skype status on your site.  SitePal (see page 155). Allows adding SitePal speaking animated characters to your site.  Site Map (see page 159). Allows displaying a hierarchical visual model of the site structure to visitors. Block modules are added and configured on the Edit step of the Wizard. General rules for working with block modules are the following:  You can add any number of block modules to a page.  To insert a block module into the page, select the module icon in the Modules area on the right, click and drag it to the desired location on the page. To insert a block module in the beginning of the page, double click the module title in the Modules area.  Block modules cannot be viewed directly on the Edit step. You can only configure block modules there. To preview block modules as they are displayed on your site, click Preview.  To delete a block module from the page, click Remove Module on the block module dialog box. For details on configuring each particular module, see the corresponding sections further in this guide. For information on how to operate with lists of objects appearing on module management screens, refer to section Working with Lists (on page 14).
  • 72. 72 Populating Site with Content In this section: Adding Blog ....................................................................................................... 73 Adding Image Gallery ........................................................................................ 80 Adding Online Store .......................................................................................... 88 Providing Content for Download ........................................................................ 118 Adding Flash Intro ............................................................................................. 119 Adding Forum.................................................................................................... 120 Adding Guestbook ............................................................................................. 128 Providing Registration to Your Site Visitors ....................................................... 132 Incorporating Link to External Page into Your Site Menu ................................... 138 Adding Maps ..................................................................................................... 138 Adding Feedback Form ..................................................................................... 143 Adding RSS News Feeds .................................................................................. 148 Inserting Scripts into Your Web Pages .............................................................. 150 Conducting Polls and Online Surveys................................................................ 152 Adding Online Status Indicator .......................................................................... 154 Adding SitePal Animated Character .................................................................. 155 Adding Site Map ................................................................................................ 159
  • 73. Populating Site with Content 73 Adding Blog A blog is a publicly accessible personal diary or journal consisting of messages (posts) and visitors' comments. You can add a blog to your site and post your messages there. The visitors of your site can read your blog posts and leave their comments. If you have lots of posts in you blog, you can subdivide them into categories for convenience.  To add a blog to your site: 1 Go to the Pages step. 2 Select Blog in the Special pages box. 3 Click . You can add several blogs to your site.  To proceed to setting up your blog: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 Select Blog in the Site map area. Figure 40: Blog Editor In this section: Managing Posts in Your Blog ............................................................................ 74 Managing Comments to Blog Posts .................................................................. 76 Managing Categories of Blog Posts .................................................................. 77 Setting Up Blog Appearance ............................................................................. 79
  • 74. 74 Populating Site with Content Managing Posts in Your Blog After you add a blog to your site, the next step is to fill it in with posts. The procedures of adding and managing your blog posts are described in the current section. By default, the module contains two default blog posts, which you can remove (see page 75) or edit as desired (see page 75). Posting to Your Blog  To add a blog post: 1 On the Blog page, go to the Content tab. 2 Click Add New Post. 3 Enter a post subject in the Subject field. 4 Enter the post text in the Content field. If you wish to hide a part of your post under a cut, input it below the %placeToCut tag. 5 If you want to add an image to the post, click the Insert/Edit Image icon, navigate to the image file, click Send it to the Server and then click OK. Optionally, in the Alternative Text field, and type the text to be displayed when a user hovers the cursor over the image. 6 Click OK. By default, the blog contains two default categories. After you add some new categories (see page 77), or edit the existing ones (see page 78), you can refer the created post to the desired category, or to several categories.
  • 75. Populating Site with Content 75 Figure 41: Posting to Your Blog Editing Post  To edit an existing blog post: 1 On the Blog page, go to the Content tab. 2 Click the Edit icon beside the post you want to edit. 3 Edit the post as desired. 4 Click OK. Removing Post  To remove a post from the blog: 1 On the Blog page, go to the Content tab. 2 Select the post you want to remove. 3 Click Remove Selected.
  • 76. 76 Populating Site with Content Managing Comments to Blog Posts All your posted entries can be commented by your site visitors. You can edit and manage these comments, and add your own ones. The procedures of adding and managing your blog comments are described in the current section. Note: To prevent automated computer generated spam comments, anonymous users will be required to enter a confirmation code to be able to comment on your blog. Adding Comment  To add a comment: 1 On the Blog page, go to the Content tab. 2 Click View/Edit Comments beside the corresponding post. 3 Click Add New Comment. 4 Enter a comment subject in the Subject field. 5 Enter your name in the Posted by field. 6 Enter the text of the comment in the Content field. 7 Click OK. To return to the list of posts, click Back to Posts. Figure 42: Adding a Comment to a Blog Post Editing Comment As a blog owner, you can edit both your own and your blog visitors' comments.
  • 77. Populating Site with Content 77  To edit a comment: 1 On the Blog page, go to the Content tab. 2 Click View/Edit Comments beside the corresponding post. 3 Click the Edit icon beside the comment you want to edit. 4 Edit the comment as desired. 5 Click OK. To return to the list of posts, click Back to Posts. Removing Comment  To remove a comment: 1 On the Blog page, go to the Content tab. 2 Click View/Edit Comments beside the corresponding post. 3 Select the comment you want to remove. 4 Click Remove Selected. To return to the list of posts, click Back to Posts. Managing Categories of Blog Posts After you add some messages to your blog, you can group them by the discussed subject. In Plesk Sitebuilder, these subjects are referred to as categories. See the following sections to learn how to create and manage categories. Sitebuilder offers two default blog post categories, which you can remove (see page 79) or edit as desired (see page 78). Adding Category  To add a category: 1 On the Blog page, click the Categories tab. 2 Click Add New Category. 3 On the Main Properties tab, enter a name for the new category in the Name field. 4 If you want to provide a short description for the category, enter it on the Description tab. 5 Click OK.
  • 78. 78 Populating Site with Content Figure 43: Adding a Category for Blog Posts Editing Category  To edit a category: 1 On the Blog page, click the Categories tab. 2 Click the Edit icon beside the category you want to edit. 3 Edit the category properties as desired. 4 Click OK.
  • 79. Populating Site with Content 79 Changing Order of Categories You can change the order of categories as they appear in your blog by moving particular categories up and down in the list.  To move a category up or down in the list: 1 On the Blog page, click the Categories tab. 2 Click an upward or a downward arrow against the category name. One click on the icon moves the category one position up or down respectively. For categories which have reached the topmost or the bottom position of the list, the upward or downward arrows are not displayed, correspondingly. Removing Category  To remove a category: 1 On the Blog page, click the Categories tab. 2 Select a category you want to remove. 3 Click Remove Selected. Note: After a category is removed, all posts which have been assigned to it remain in the blog. Setting Up Blog Appearance  To set up the appearance of your blog: 1 On the Blog page, click the Settings tab. 2 Enter the maximum number of posts on one blog page in the Posts per page field. 3 Enter the maximum number of comments to be displayed on one post page in the Comments per page field. To preview your blog page appearance, click Preview at the bottom of the Plesk Sitebuilder window and go to the blog page of your web site. Figure 44: Setting Up Blog Appearance
  • 80. 80 Populating Site with Content Adding Image Gallery The Image Gallery module allows you to place an image gallery or a series of photo albums on your site in an easy and comfortable way. You can upload images, describe and categorize them, set the order of images, etc.  To add an image gallery to your site: 1 Go to the Pages step. 2 Select Image Gallery in the Special pages box. 3 Click . You can add several image galleries to your site.  To proceed to setting up your image gallery: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 Select Image Gallery in the Site map. Figure 45: Image Gallery Editor In this section: Managing Images .............................................................................................. 81 Managing Categories of Images ........................................................................ 85 Setting Up Image Gallery Appearance .............................................................. 87
  • 81. Populating Site with Content 81 Managing Images After you add an image gallery to your site, the next step is to fill it in with images. The procedures of managing images are described in the current section. Uploading Images Plesk Sitebuilder Image Gallery supports images in *.jpg, *.gif, and *.png formats. To ensure correct operation of the module, we do not recommend uploading images of more than 3 MB in size.  To upload several images: 1 On the Image Gallery page, click Image Upload on the Images tab. 2 Locate the images you wish to upload in the provided Image file fields. To locate an image, click the corresponding Browse button, navigate to the image file in your file system, and click Open. 3 Provide titles for the images in the corresponding Name fields. By default, images are saved under the same names under which they are stored on your computer. If you wish to save them under different names, clear the check box Use the file name as default image name and specify the names you prefer. 4 To set the size of images as they appear in your gallery, select one of the options from the Resize images box. The available options are:  1152x864  1024x768  800x600  640x480  480x360  360x270  Do not resize By default the 1024x768 image resize option is used. 5 Click OK. You can view the list of images on the Images tab. By default, the gallery contains two default categories. After you add some new categories (see page 85), or edit the existing ones (see page 86), you can refer the image to a desired category, or to several categories.
  • 82. 82 Populating Site with Content Figure 46: Uploading Images Plesk Sitebuilder provides a possibility of batch image upload, allowing to publish many images at once. You can upload the images from your local file system, and perform a group resize operation on them. The maximum size of the batch is determined by the disk space on the publishing server and by the parameters of the network.  To upload multiple images: 1 Arrange the images you want to upload in one folder on your computer. 2 On the Image Gallery page, click Multiple Image Upload on the Images tab. 3 In the left frame of the Multiple Image Upload window, navigate to the required folder in your file system. 4 Select the images you want to upload in the work area of the screen. When selecting images, follow these guidelines:  To select or deselect an image, click it.  To select all images in the folder, click Select All.  To deselect all images, click Deselect All. 5 From the Upload to category list, select a category to refer images to:  If you have already created a category for your images, select the required category from the list.  If you want to create a new category for the images, select Create new category and type the category name in the field that appears.  If you do not want to refer images to any category, select No category. 6 From the Resize images list, select the desired resizing option. The available options are:  1024x768 px
  • 83. Populating Site with Content 83  800x600 px  640x480 px  Do not resize. 7 Click Upload. 8 After the upload is complete, click OK on the progress bar and on the screen. Figure 47: Uploading Multiple Images You have an option of adding professional images from a worldwide stock images marketplace, Fotolia (http://www.fotolia.com/parallels/), to your gallery. Click Buy Pictures to proceed to the Fotolia web site, where you can browse the Fotolia gallery and buy images. As a Parallels customer, you have a 20% bonus when purchasing Fotolia images. Previewing Images  To preview an image: 1 On the Image Gallery page, go to the Images tab. 2 Click the Preview icon against the image you want to preview. The image opens in a new window.
  • 84. 84 Populating Site with Content Editing Image Properties  To edit an image: 1 On the Image Gallery page, go to the Images tab. 2 Click the Edit icon against the image you want to edit. 3 Configure the image parameters as desired. 4 Click OK. Removing Images  To remove an image: 1 On the Image Gallery page, go to the Images tab. 2 Select the image you want to remove. 3 Click Remove Selected.
  • 85. Populating Site with Content 85 Managing Categories of Images You can organize your images in photo albums, by arranging them in categories. One image may belong to one or several categories at the same time. Splitting images into categories is especially convenient when you have a large number of images. See the following sections to learn how to create and manage categories. Plesk Sitebuilder offers two default categories, which you can remove (see page 87) or edit as desired (see page 86). Adding Category  To add a category: 1 On the Image Gallery page, click the Categories tab. 2 Click Add New Category. 3 On the Main Properties tab, enter a name for the new category in the Name field. 4 If you want to upload an image to be displayed beside the category name, click Browse, select an image file on your computer and click Open, then click Upload. The maximum image size is 100x100 px; larger or smaller images will be resized accordingly. The uploaded image is displayed in the Current image area. 5 If you want to provide a short description for the category, enter it on the Description tab. Site visitors see this description beside the category name. 6 Click OK. Figure 48: Adding a Category for Images
  • 86. 86 Populating Site with Content Editing Category  To edit a category: 1 On the Image Gallery page, click the Categories tab. 2 Click the Edit icon beside the category you want to edit. 3 Configure the category parameters as desired. 4 Click OK.
  • 87. Populating Site with Content 87 Changing Order of Categories You can change the order in which categories appear in your gallery by moving particular categories up and down the list.  To move a category up or down in the list: 1 On the Image Gallery page, click the Categories tab. 2 Click an upward or a downward arrow against the category name. One click on the icon moves the category one position up or down respectively. For categories which have reached the topmost or the bottom position of the list, the upward or downward arrows are not displayed, correspondingly. Removing Category  To remove a category: 1 On the Image Gallery page, click the Categories tab. 2 Select the category you want to remove. 3 Click Remove Selected. Note: After a category is removed, all images which have been assigned to it remain in the gallery. Setting Up Image Gallery Appearance  To set up image gallery appearance: 1 On the Image Gallery page, click the Settings tab. 2 Configure the following settings:  Category image width (px) - the width of the category image. When you set smaller width than the original one, the picture height is resized accordingly to keep the width-height ratio. You cannot set larger image width than the original one.  Image thumb width (px) - the width of the image thumbnail.  Image thumb height (px) - the height of the image thumbnail.  Preview width (px) - the width of the image preview (opened by clicking on the image thumbnail). When you set smaller width than the original one, the picture height is resized accordingly to keep the width-height ratio. You cannot set larger image width than the original one.  Images per page - the number of images to be displayed per page. To preview your image gallery, click Preview at the bottom of the Plesk Sitebuilder window and go to the image gallery page of your web site.
  • 88. 88 Populating Site with Content Figure 49: Setting Up Image Gallery Appearance Adding Online Store In Plesk Sitebuilder you can set up your own online store by adding the eShop module into your site. You, as the online store owner, can offer your customers a feature-rich product catalog, accept online payments from buyers, and manage orders submitted by them. You can integrate your e-commerce resource with various payment gateways, so that customers can pay for their purchases using their credit cards.  To add an online store to your site: 1 Go to the Pages step. 2 Select eShop in the Special pages box. 3 Click . You can set up several online stores on your site by adding as many eShop page modules to your site structure as necessary. Currency, payment settings, lists of categories and products you create in different eShop modules are independent of each other.  To proceed to setting up your online store: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 Click eShop in the Site map area.
  • 89. Populating Site with Content 89 Figure 50: Online Store Editor In this section: Managing Products ........................................................................................... 89 Arranging Products in Categories ...................................................................... 95 Setting Up Catalog Appearance ........................................................................ 98 Configuring Payment Settings for Your Online Store ......................................... 99 Specifying Terms of Service for Your Customers .............................................. 105 Previewing Your Catalog ................................................................................... 106 Setting Up Customer Order Notification............................................................. 110 Making Your Catalog Searchable by Google ..................................................... 111 Supplying Your Product Catalog as RSS Feed.................................................. 115 Managing Customers' Orders ............................................................................ 117 Managing Products After you add the eShop module to your site, the next step is to populate it with products. The procedures of adding and managing products are described in the current section. In this section: Adding Product to Catalog................................................................................. 90 Editing Product Properties ................................................................................. 94 Removing Product ............................................................................................. 94
  • 90. 90 Populating Site with Content Adding Product to Catalog On the Products tab you will find two default products, which you can edit as desired (see page 94), or remove (see page 94) from your catalog.  To add a new product: 1 On the eShop page, go to the Products tab. 2 Click Add New Product. 3 Enter the name under which the product is displayed in the catalog in the Name field. 4 Enter the product price in the Price field (it will be displayed to site visitors in the currency and format you select on the Payment Systems tab). 5 If you want to control the flow of goods as you ship them to customers and refill the stock, enter the quantity of this product on stock in the Stock level field. (By default, stock level tracking is enabled in your eShop. If you do not wish to use this feature, you can disable it in your online store settings (eShop > Settings tab > Enable stock level tracking check box). Product stock quantity remains visible on the Products tab of your online store settings, but the quantity is not recalculated after you change the order status.) The stock level calculation is performed according to the following rules:  When your customer buys a certain quantity of products in your online store, the fact of the purchase does not affect the product quantity record. Only after you, as the online store owner, manually change the customer's order status to Processed or Completed, the quantity of items in the order is subtracted from the stock quantity record.  If later you change either of these two statuses to any other order statuses in Plesk Sitebuilder (Backorder, Failed, Cancelled, etc.), the order quantity is added back to the quantity record. Stock level is not shown to your online store customers: it is intended for your internal use only, so even if the quantity of the product turns to "0" (zero), your customers will still be able to buy the product in any quantity they choose. 6 If you do not wish to sell the product, just to display informati on about it, select the Advertise only check box. Your e-shop buyers won't be able to add this product to their carts. 7 If you want to upload an image of the product, click Browse, navigate to the image file and click Upload. You can open the full-size preview of this image by clicking on it. Later you can view this image by clicking the corresponding icon on the Products tab. In your online store catalog, the image is shown as a thumbnail on the following pages:  Beside the product name and description on the catalog page
  • 91. Populating Site with Content 91  On the product page The full-size image is opened upon clicking the thumbnail. 8 If you want to add a short description of the product, enter it in the Brief description text box. The brief product description is displayed on the main catalog page, or on the page of the category the product belongs to. 9 If you want to accompany your product with a detailed description, enter it in the Full description text box. The full product description is displayed on the product details page. Figure 51: Adding a Product to Catalog 10 If you wish to specify several color options for the product, go to the Colors tab and click Add New Color.  In the Color name field, specify a name that will be easy for you to associate with this color.
  • 92. 92 Populating Site with Content  Click the icon and choose a desired color from the palette. The color HEX code automatically appears in the Color value field.  If you wish to upload a separate image illustrating the specified color modification of the product, click Browse, navigate to the image file and click Upload. The thumbnail is shown on the product page after a visitor clicks on the corresponding color icon. Note: If later you wish to remove the color modification image, click the Reset to default image shortcut for the corresponding color on the Colors tab. In the catalog, the main product image (the one from the Main Properties tab) is shown for this color modification.  To set the order in which color options are displayed, use the upward and downward arrows.  To remove a color option, click against the corresponding option. Available color options are shown both on the main catalog page and on the product page. Figure 52: Adding Color Options for a Product 11 If you wish to specify other product options (such as size, manufacturer, etc.), go to the Options tab, select the option type from the drop-down list (Apparel size, Shoe size (US, UK, EU), or Custom option), and click Add New Option.
  • 93. Populating Site with Content 93  For regular product options (Apparel size, Shoe size (US, UK, EU), Plesk Sitebuilder suggests default size values. Note: In the Name in RSS feed field, Plesk Sitebuilder automatically inputs a Google Base RSS 2.0 attribute. This attribute may be useful if later you wish to upload your catalog to the Google Base service (see page 111), to ensure your products rank higher in main Google searches. If you wish to provide your product catalog as an RSS feed (see page 115), you can input any XML tag which is understandable by the RSS reader used by the party you supply the feed to.  For custom options, specify a name for the option in the Name in catalog field and enter modifications in the Values field (separated by comma or semicolon). If necessary, specify a Google Base attribute (see Appendix (on page 170)), or any XML tag in the Name in RSS field.  To set the order in which options are displayed, use the upward and downward arrows.  To remove an option, click against the corresponding option. Figure 53: Adding Product Options 12 If you wish to refer a product to a category (or categories), go to the Categories tab and select the appropriate categories. By default, the module contains two default categories. After you add some categories (see page 95) of your own, or edit the existing ones (see page 97), you can refer the created product to a desired category, or to several categories.
  • 94. 94 Populating Site with Content 13 Click OK. Editing Product Properties  To edit the properties of a product: 1 On the eShop page, go to the Products tab. 2 Click the Edit icon for the product you want to edit. 3 Edit the product properties as described in Adding Product to Catalog (on page 90). 4 Click OK. Removing Product  To remove a product from your online store: 1 On the eShop page, go to the Products tab. 2 Select the product you want to remove. 3 Click Remove Selected.
  • 95. Populating Site with Content 95 Arranging Products in Categories After you add a number of products to your e-shop, you may need to arrange them in categories, so that your customers could easily navigate in your catalog. On the Categories tab you will find two default categories, which you can edit as desired (see page 97), or remove from your catalog (see page 98). For each product in your online store catalog, the following details are displayed to your site visitors:  Category name. By clicking it a visitor proceeds to the category page.  The number of products contained in the category, in brackets beside the category name.  Category image, if uploaded.  Category description. By clicking the category name, your site visitor gets to the category page on which the following information is shown:  Category description.  A list of products contained in the category. A customer can navigate back to the catalog by clicking the Back to catalog shortcut. Read the current section to know how you can configure all these parameters for a category. Adding Category to Catalog On the Categories tab you will find two default categories, which you can edit as desired, or remove from your catalog.  To add a product category: 1 On the eShop page, click the Categories tab. 2 Click Add New Category. 3 Enter a name of the new category in the Name field. 4 If you want to make this category a subcategory of an earlier created category, select one from the Parent category list. You can create as many levels of categories hierarchy as you wish.
  • 96. 96 Populating Site with Content Figure 54: Creating a Subcategory 5 If you want to add an image that will be displayed beside the category name in the catalog, click Browse, locate an image file and click Upload. Note: Later you can preview this image on the Categories tab by clicking the icon for the product in the P (preview) column. For categories for which no image has been uploaded, this icon is not displayed. 6 If you want to provide a short description for the category, enter it in the Category description text box. 7 Click OK. Newly created categories appear in your eShop catalog in the order of their creation. For details about changing the order of categories in the catalog, see Changing Order of Categories (on page 98).
  • 97. Populating Site with Content 97 Figure 55: Creating a Category for Products Editing Category  To edit an existing category 1 On the eShop page, click the Categories tab. 2 Click the Edit icon for the category you wish to edit. 3 Edit the category properties as desired. 4 Click OK.
  • 98. 98 Populating Site with Content Changing Order of Categories You can change the order in which categories appear in your catalog by moving particular categories up and down in the list.  To move a category up or down in the list: 1 On the eShop page, click the Categories tab. 2 Click an upward or a downward arrow against the category name. One click on the icon moves the category one position up or down respectively. For categories occupying the topmost or the bottom position of the list, the upward or downward arrows are not displayed, correspondingly. Removing Category  To remove a category: 1 On the eShop page, click the Categories tab. 2 Select a category you want to remove. 3 Click Remove Selected. Note: When a category is removed, the products belonging to this category remain in the catalog. These products are displayed in the uncategorized list, unless they have been assigned to other categories. Setting Up Catalog Appearance The main page of your eShop displays the first page of the product catalog. To preview your catalog appearance, click Preview at the bottom of the Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard window and go to the online store page of your web site. The catalog page is divided into two sections:  The product categories section  The uncategorized products list (products are shown one below another, in the order of their creation).  To configure the appearance of your product catalog: 1 On the eShop page, go to the Settings tab. 2 To customize the number of columns displayed in the categories list, select the desired value (from 1 to 5) from the field Number of columns in the categories list. By default, categories are shown in two columns. To show categories one below another, like items in the uncategorized product section, set the number of columns to "1".
  • 99. Populating Site with Content 99 3 To define the number of products to be displayed on one page, select a desired value (from 5 to 55) from the Number of products per page list. These settings apply to all product lists - to the list of uncategorized products shown on the front page of your online store, and to the list of products contained in each category. By default, 10 products per page are shown. You can set the number of products per page to 5, 15, 20, 25 and so on, up to 55. 4 To customize the order of sections on the catalog page, select either of the two options:  Show categories first (selected by default) OR  Show uncategorized products first 5 If you wish to change the order of categories in your catalog, go the Categories tab and set the desired order using the upward or downward arrows. Figure 56: Setting Up Catalog Appearance Configuring Payment Settings for Your Online Store You can configure the following payment settings for your online store:  Currency and price format  Payment systems and shipping methods In this section: Setting Currency and Price Format ....................................................................100 Configuring Payment Methods ...........................................................................101 Adding Shipping Costs.......................................................................................104
  • 100. 100 Populating Site with Content Setting Currency and Price Format  To set currency and price format for your store: 1 On the eShop page, go to the Payment Systems tab. By default, the currency and price format of your online store are the same as for the whole site (set on the Pages step, in the Site regional and language options area). 2 If you wish to change the currency and price format, click Change Currency Settings. 3 Select a desired currency from the Currency list. Note: When selecting currency, make sure it is supported by all payment gateways you wish to integrate with your online store. 4 If the currency symbol should go before the numeric value, enter it into the Symbol on the left field. 5 If the currency symbol should go after the numeric value, enter it into the Symbol on the right field. 6 Enter the decimal point (period or comma) to be used with prices into the Decimal point field.
  • 101. Populating Site with Content 101 Configuring Payment Methods In Plesk Sitebuilder, you can offer your customers the following payment options:  Offline payment options:  Cash on delivery. Payment is made, when a product is delivered to a customer.  Check / Money order. A customer issues a check or a money order that will be sent to you by regular mail.  Online payment options:  PayPal  Authorize.Net  WorldPay  BluePay  2Checkout.com This is the default list of available payment systems. Plesk Sitebuilder administrator can disable some of the payment systems and integrate a custom payment system to the eShop module. To see the list of payment methods available to you, as the store owner, go to the Payment Systems tab on the eShop page of your Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard. Using online payment options allows your online store buyers to pay using their credit cards. When a buyer selects an online payment system, he or she is asked to fill in the relevant payment details on the Checkout form. After the order is submitted, the transaction is processed by the payment gateway, and returned with a certain status (successful or unsuccessful), which automatically changes the order status in Plesk Sitebuilder to Paid, or Failed, correspondingly. Note: For offline payment options, you need to change the order status manually. To be able to use the online payment options on your site, you need to integrate these payment system gateways with your online store. In Plesk Sitebuilder, you do not need any programming or third party scripts to do this - you only need to register merchant accounts with the preferred payment systems and fill in your merchant account data in the appropriate fields in Plesk Sitebuilder. At any moment later you can disable any of the payment methods you configure for your customers. When a payment method is disabled, it disappears from the shopping cart settings, with all integration settings remaining in the system in read-only format (grayed out). By default, all payment options, expect for Cash on delivery, are disabled. Note: 1. Before registering with the provided online payment systems, refer to their web sites and make sure that the currency you chose for your online store is supported. 2. Requests to all online payment systems are executed only on published sites.
  • 102. 102 Populating Site with Content Configuring Check/Money Order Payment Method  To customize check/money order settings: 1 On the eShop page, click the Payment Systems tab. 2 To enable this payment option in your visitors' shopping carts, select the check box beside its name. 3 In the Make payable to field, enter the name of the person to whom funds will be sent. 4 In the Send to address field, enter the postal address where the check or order should be sent.
  • 103. Populating Site with Content 103 Configuring PayPal Integration  To configure the PayPal payment system for your online store: 1 On the eShop page, click the Payment Systems tab. 2 To enable this payment system in your visitors' shopping carts, select the check box beside its name. 3 In the PayPal account (e-mail) field, enter the e-mail address you use to log in to PayPal. Note: Requests to PayPal server are executed only on published sites. If you open your site in the preview mode, you can see the corresponding window, but the request to PayPal server is not executed. Configuring Authorize.Net Integration  To integrate Authorize.Net payment system in your online store: 1 On the eShop page, click the Payment Systems tab. 2 To enable this payment system in your visitors' shopping carts, select the check box beside its name. 3 In the Login field, enter the login (user name) you use to log in to Authorize.Net. 4 In the Transaction key field, enter the transaction key used for encrypting data. Note: Requests to Authorize.Net server are executed only on published sites. If you open your site in the preview mode, you can see the corresponding window, but the request to Authorize.Net server is not executed. Configuring WorldPay Integration  To integrate WorldPay payment system in your online store: 1 On the eShop page, click the Payment Systems tab. 2 To enable this payment system in your visitors' shopping carts, select the check box beside its name. 3 Enter the Installation ID given to you by WorldPay. Note: Requests to WorldPay server are executed only on published sites. If you open your site in the preview mode, you can see the corresponding window, but the request to WorldPay server is not executed.
  • 104. 104 Populating Site with Content Configuring BluePay Integration  To configure the BluePay payment system for your online store: 1 On the eShop page, click the Payment Systems tab. 2 To enable this payment system in your visitors' shoppin g carts, select the check box beside its name. 3 In the Merchant ID and Secret Key fields, provide the corresponding data which you received from BluePay. If you do not have a BluePay merchant account yet, you can get one directly from Plesk Sitebuilder. To do so, click the Sign up now shortcut and fill out the opened form. After you provide all required data and click OK, a Merchant ID and a Secret Key will be generated for you and will be automatically put into the corresponding fields on the Payment Systems tab. If you do not see the Sign up now shortcut, it means that this option has been disabled by your Plesk Sitebuilder provider. Note: Requests to BluePay server are executed only on published sites. If you open your site in the preview mode, you can see the corresponding window, but the request to BluePay server is not executed. Configuring 2Checkout.com Integration  To configure the 2Checkout.com payment system for your online store: 1 On the eShop page, click the Payment Systems tab. 2 To enable this payment system in your visitors' shopping carts, select the check box beside its name. 3 In the Vendor account number field, enter the login/user name you use to log in to 2Checkout.com. 4 Click OK. Note: Requests to the 2Checkout.com server are executed only on published sites. If you open your site in the preview mode, you can see the corresponding window, but the request to 2Checkout.com server is not executed. Adding Shipping Costs Plesk Sitebuilder allows you to add a shipping cost to the order total in your online store. You can specify a flat rate for each available delivery method or geographical area. When placing an order in your online store, the customer chooses a shipping method on the checkout page (a required option), and the cost associated with the method is added to the order total.
  • 105. Populating Site with Content 105 If you do not specify any shipping method for your online store, the shipping method option does not appear on the checkout page.  To add a shipping method: 1 On the eShop page, click the Shipping Methods tab. 2 Click Add New Shipping Method. 3 On the Main Properties tab:  Specify the method name in the Shipping method field  Enter the delivery cost in the Shipping cost field 4 If you want to provide a short description of the method, enter it on the Description tab. 5 Click OK. Figure 57: Creating a Shipping Method Specifying Terms of Service for Your Customers As the online store owner, you might want to report your terms of service to your customers - to clarify rights and responsibilities of both sides. These terms will be displayed after a customer clicks the Checkout button, on the order confirmation page. Also, you can accompany the text of your terms with a check box requiring customers to confirm their accepting of the terms.  To specify your terms of service: 1 On the eShop page, click the Notifications tab. 2 In the Terms of Service section, in Caption field, type the heading for the terms of service. It will be displayed in bigger and bold font above the terms text. 3 In the Text field, specify the text of your terms. Until you provide your text in this field, no information you have specified on the Terms of Service tab is visible to your customers.
  • 106. 106 Populating Site with Content 4 If you want your customers to confirm their understanding and acceptance of your terms, you can place a check box below the terms text. The label text for this check box you specify in the Acceptance check box label field. For example: I have read and agree to the Terms of Service listed above. Customers will not be able to proceed with the order until they select the acceptance check box. If you leave this field empty, no confirmation is requested from your customers and no check box is displayed below your terms of service. Figure 58: Specifying Terms of Service for Your Customers Previewing Your Catalog Once you add a product to your catalog, you can preview it and make a test purchase to see how your customers will navigate your online store and place their orders. To do so, click the Preview button at the bottom of Plesk Sitebuilder window and navigate to the online store page. For each product, the following details are displayed to your site visitors:  Product name. By clicking it a visitor proceeds to the product details page.  Product image thumbnail, if uploaded. Clicking the thumbnail opens a full-size product image in the new window.  Brief product description, if specified.  Product color options, if specified (displayed as square icons of appropriate color).  Other options of the products, if specified (for example, size).  Product price, given in the currency of your online store (see Setting Currency and Price Format (on page 100)).
  • 107. Populating Site with Content 107 If the product is set as an "advertise only" item and its price is set to ' 0 ' (zero), price is not shown for this product. For sellable products with zero price, price is shown as ' 0.00 '.  Actions available for the product:  For products which have no color and other options specified - the Add to Cart and Buy buttons.  For products which allow several options to choose from - the Select and Buy button, which leads to the product page. If the product is set as an "advertise only" item, no action buttons are displayed. Figure 59: Catalog Front Page By clicking the product name, your site visitor gets to the product page on which the following information is shown:  Product name.  Product image thumbnail, if uploaded. Clicking on the thumbnail opens a full-size product image in the new window.  Full product description.  Product color options, if specified. For each color option, your visitors will see:  A clickable icon of appropriate color. Clicking an icon will display the image of the product in this color modification (if uploaded).  The color name you specified while adding this color option.  Other options of the product, if specified. Each option is shown as a drop-down list from which visitors select a desired value.  Product price.  The Add to Cart and Buy buttons.  The Back to catalog shortcut.
  • 108. 108 Populating Site with Content Figure 60: Product Details Page When your customers click Add to Cart for a certain product in the catalog, this product is added to their shopping cart. Having filled the cart, customers click Buy to proceed to the shopping cart itself and actually purchase the items. The first page of your shopping cart displays the following details:  For each product: the product name and color/other options, price per item, quantity, and the product subtotal (quantity x price). Customers can specify any quantity for each product they want to purchase, or, if necessary, delete items from the shopping cart by clicking Delete or by setting "0" in the Quantity field.  The order total (without shipping). Figure 61: Precheckout Page On the second page of the cart, your buyers are asked to fill in their contact information, select a payment method and a shipping cost (if you have previously specified any shipping costs).
  • 109. Populating Site with Content 109 Figure 62: Checkout Page On the last page of your shopping cart, a buyer sees their full purchase details, including the shopping cart contents, contact details, selected payment and shipping methods. The buyer can edit any of these data. If you, as the online store owner, have specified your Terms of service, they are also displayed on this final page.
  • 110. 110 Populating Site with Content Figure 63: Final Checkout Page By clicking Continue buyer completes the purchase. An order is placed in Plesk Sitebuilder (with a New status), order confirmation is sent to the customer's e-mail, and a payment transaction is initiated (in case one of the online payment options was chosen). Setting Up Customer Order Notification You can customize automatic order confirmation message sent to your buyers by Plesk Sitebuilder.  To set up order notification message: 1 On the eShop page, go to the Notifications tab. 2 In the E-mail field, enter the e-mail to be displayed in the From field of the notification e-mail. 3 In the Subject field, enter the subject of the notification e-mail. 4 In the Message field, enter the text of the notification e-mail. You can insert the following macros into the body of the notification message:  Site URL
  • 111. Populating Site with Content 111  The shopping cart contents To insert these macros, choose them from the Macro list on the WYSIWYG panel. Figure 64: Setting Up Customer Order Notification Making Your Catalog Searchable by Google Submitting information about your products to Google Base will make your catalog searchable on Google Product Search (http://www.google.com/products), Google Maps (http://maps.google.com/) and on the main Google web search (http://www.google.com/). To submit a catalog to Google Base means to upload an XML file containing the information about your products to your Google Base account. Creating such a file does not require any XML knowledge because Plesk Sitebuilder will automatically convert all information from your catalog into RSS 2.0 XML file fully compatible with Google Base requirements. In this XML file, Plesk Sitebuilder puts the following information about each your product: product name, the category a product belongs to, full product description, price, quantity on stock, color, other options (size, etc.), and a link to the product page. Regular product options, such as Apparel size, and Shoe size (US, UK, EU), are automatically indexed with the corresponding Google Base attribute (g:size). If you have specified some custom options for your products (such as country of origin, dimensions, manufacturer/brand name, etc.), and wish to make your catalog searchable by them as well, you will need to index these options manually as described in Indexing Custom Product Options (see page 114). To submit your catalog to Google Base, use the Bulk Upload option. Google Base allows you to upload up to 100000 items per bulk upload, with a maximum file size of 20MB. If you wish to upload a larger file, contact Google Base for assistance (http://base.google.com/support/bin/request.py). Prior to uploading information to Google Base, we recommend to make sure that your online catalog information complies with the Google Base Program Policies (http://base.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=61118&topic=2906).
  • 112. 112 Populating Site with Content To upload your catalog to Google Base, you need a Google account. If you do not have a Google account yet, click here (https://www.google.com/accounts/NewAccount) to register one.  To submit your catalog to Google Base: 1 Open your site preview and go to the online store page. 2 Right-click the RSS link on the catalog page and select Save Target As... (in Internet Explorer), or Save Link As... (in Mozilla Firefox) from the context menu and save the file with .xml extension. Figure 65: Submitting Your Catalog to Google Base. Step 1. Note: In Internet Explorer, specify any arbitrary name in the File name field, and leave the default option XML Document selected in the Save as type field. In Mozilla Firefox, specify the file name in format filename.xml in the File name field, and select All Files from the Save as type field. Having saved the file, make sure that it keeps the .xml extension. 3 Open the Bulk Upload Instructions page on Google Base web site (http://base.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=59537&hl=en ) and click the Get started: register and submit your bulk upload link at the bottom of the page. 4 On the About Me page, you will be asked to provide the Display name, Description (optional) and Website URL (optional) to be displayed on your Google Base account page. By default, the Display name field contains your e-mail address specified at Google account registration. You may leave this default value as is, leave the optional fields blank and proceed. If later you wish to specify or edit this information, go to the Settings tab of your Google Base account page, specify the information and click Save Changes at the bottom of the page. 5 Click Next to continue. 6 On the Specify a Bulk Upload page:
  • 113. Populating Site with Content 113  Enter any arbitrary name for the uploaded file in the File name field. Under this name the file will appear on the Bulk Upload tab of your Google Base account page. Note: The file name must also end with the .xml extension. The file name may contain Latin characters and numbers only, and may not contain spaces.  Select the Item type (the type of items in your online catalog) from the provided drop-down box, or specify your custom item type. 7 Click Register bulk upload file and continue to formatting instructions at the bottom of the page. 8 On the Format your Products page, click I'm done formatting my file. Continue to upload. All basic formatting of your catalog is done automatically by Plesk Sitebuilder. For instructions on specifying RSS attributes for additional product options (such as size, country of origin and other parameters), read section Indexing Custom Product Options (on page 114). 9 On the file upload page, click Browse, locate the catalog file in your local file system and click Upload and process this file. The Google Base dashboard will show status Processing bulk upload file for your file. Items submitted via bulk upload are indexed within 24 hours. After the file is successfully processed, the file status turns to Success, denoting that your catalog items are now searchable by Google. If the page shows status Bulk upload failure, click the See details and get help link for troubleshooting instructions. Try fixing the issue and re-uploading the file (by clicking the delete this file link and repeating the bulk upload procedure). In this section: Indexing Custom Product Options......................................................................114
  • 114. 114 Populating Site with Content Indexing Custom Product Options Prior to submitting your product catalog to Google Base, consider indexing the relevant custom options for each of your products. You can specify option attributes in one of the following formats:  Regular Google Base attributes marked with the "g:" prefix (g:made_in, g:width, etc.) Custom attributes you can create in Google Base, starting with the "c:" prefix Attributes from namespaces other than g: and c: are not allowed.  To index your product properties with regular Google Base attributes: 1 On the eShop page, click the name of the product you wish to index the properties for. 2 On the Options tab, in the field Name in RSS feed, specify a corresponding Google Base attribute for each relevant product option. For regular eShop options, such as Apparel size, and Shoe size (US, UK, EU), the corresponding Google Base attribute (g:size) is specified automatically by Plesk Sitebuilder. Note: Specify the full RSS attribute name, without the brackets (for example, g:made_in). For a list of Google Base tags, refer to Appendix (on page 170). The full list of option tags is available on the Google Base web site (http://base.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=59451&hl=en). 3 Click OK. If you do not find the attribute that properly describes your product option in the list of regular Google Base attributes, you can create a custom one. For detailed information on creating custom Google Base tags, refer to Google Base web site (http://base.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=59558&hl=en). Note: The possibility to specify data type for an option is not supported by Plesk Sitebuilder. You specify the namespace prefix and the tag name only; the data type is set to its default value - String, which allows inputting any arbitrary text string containing any characters (except for line breaks).
  • 115. Populating Site with Content 115 Figure 66: Adding Product Options Supplying Your Product Catalog as RSS Feed Subscribing to your catalog RSS feed enables the customers to browse your product offerings and check for updates on a regular basis. Converting the contents of your online store catalog to RSS 2.0 format is done automatically by Plesk Sitebuilder: the RSS button is placed on the front page of your online store and by clicking this button, the customers proceed to a page where they can subscribe to your catalog RSS feed. The same RSS button is also shown on each category page, allowing your customers to monitor certain product categories only. In Internet Explorer starting from version 7.0, the subscription is done by adding your feed to the browser's Favorites Center. In Mozilla Firefox, your customers will be suggested to subscribe either by adding your feed to their bookmarks or by using one of proposed RSS reader applications (Google, My Yahoo, Bloglines, and other).
  • 116. 116 Populating Site with Content Figure 67: Customer Subscription to Your Catalog RSS Feed If necessary, interested buyers and partners can incorporate your eShop RSS channel into their own web pages. To do so, they can use one of specialized add-ons - such as the Plesk Sitebuilder module RSS Reader (see page 148). The appearance of your product catalog in the RSS feed is as follows:  All products are shown in a single sheet, not sorted by category.  Products are shown in the order you define on the Products tab of your online store. For each product, the RSS feed displays:
  • 117. Populating Site with Content 117  The product name. By clicking it, customer proceeds to the product page of your online store, from which he or she can buy a product, or navigate to other pages of your online store.  The product image (if uploaded).  The full description of the product (if specified). In some cases, you may need to provide the RSS feed hyperlink to interested third parties.  To obtain the link to your catalog RSS feed: 1 On the eShop page, click Preview. 2 On the site preview, go to the online store page. 3 Right-click the RSS button on the main page of your store catalog and choose the Open in New Window option from the context menu. Figure 68: Supplying Your Product Catalog as RSS Feed. Step 1. 4 Copy the link of the RSS feed page from the browser address bar. You can supply this link to your partners by e-mail or otherwise. Managing Customers' Orders After a buyer completes and submits the Checkout form, an order is placed in your store. It appears in the list of orders on the Orders tab of the eShop page. You can perform the following operations with an order:  Change the order status  Specify a comment for an order (for example, the reason of order cancellation, or other order-specific information).  To manage an order: 1 On the eShop page, go to the Orders tab.
  • 118. 118 Populating Site with Content 2 Click the Edit icon beside an order. 3 From the Status list, select a status for the order. Orders can have one of the following statuses:  New status is automatically assigned to all new unpaid orders in the system.  Payment pending status is assigned automatically by online payment gateways to indicate that payment is in progress.  Paid status is automatically assigned to orders after online payment gateway reports a successful transaction.  Processed status is set manually for orders being processed at the time.  Backorder status is set manually to indicate deferred orders.  Completed status is set manually for orders which have been completed and delivered to the customers.  Cancelled status is set manually for orders cancelled by customers (for example, after you receive the corresponding request from your customer).  Failed status is automatically assigned to orders processed by online payment systems in case the payment transaction fails. Note: For offline payment options (Cash on Delivery and Cash/Money Order) you can specify the Paid, Payment pending or Failed statuses manually. 4 To attach a comment to the order, specify the required information in the Comment field. Commented orders are marked with the icon on the Orders tab. Hovering over this icon will display the comment text. Providing Content for Download The File Download module allows providing content for download to your site visitors. The file format is arbitrary; the maximum size of the file is determined by parameters of your network.  To add File Download module to your site: 1 On the Pages step, select File Download in the Special pages box. 2 Click . You can place only one file on the File Download page. If you wish to provide several files for download, add as many File Download pages to your site map as necessary.  To upload a file you wish to provide for download: 1 On the Edit step, select File Download in the Site map area. 2 Click Browse, select a file and click Open. 3 Click Upload. 4 Specify a name for the file in the File name field. Under this name the file will be displayed to site visitors. By default, it is the original name of the uploaded file.
  • 119. Populating Site with Content 119 Note: National characters in file extensions are not supported. If your file extension contains national characters, replace them with Latin characters, or append dot and zero (.0) at the end of the string. 5 If you want to leave your site visitors the choice to open or save the file, leave the Open file in browser option unselected. If you want the file just to open in a visitor's browser window, select the Open file in browser option. In the upper part of the screen you will see the results of the operation and the file size. To replace the uploaded file, click Browse once again and select another file. To ensure that the file download works correctly, you can perform a test download of the file. To do so, click the Download shortcut. Figure 69: Providing Content for Download Adding Flash Intro A flash intro is a flash-animated introduction clip launched prior to opening the home page of a site. You can choose between several designs of the intro and insert your own text information into it. The Flash Intro module is the only page module that requires no PHP on the publishing location and therefore can be included into a static site. Note: For correct display of Asian and Arabian national characters, make sure that you have Adobe Flash Player version 9.0 or later installed. You can add only one Flash Intro module to your site.  To add a flash intro to your site: 1 Go to the Pages step. 2 Select Flash Intro in the Special pages box. 3 Click . The Flash Intro page is always places as the first page in the site structure.
  • 120. 120 Populating Site with Content  To configure the flash intro settings: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 Select Flash Intro in the Site map area. 3 Select a design of your flash clip by clicking one of the thumbnails in the Designs area. The selected design is outlined with a red frame. 4 In Title field, enter a text to be displayed as the flash introduction title - it will appear first and in a larger font. Please bear in mind that the title of the page itself, as it will appear in the site menu and in the browser title bar, is to be specified separately in the Site map area. 5 In the Body text field, enter a text to be displayed in the body of the flash clip. 6 From the Background color list, select the background color for the flash clip. 7 From the Animation pattern list, select the type of small elements to be used in clip animation. You can see a small preview image of the flash clip with the new parameters in the Preview area. Figure 70: Adding Flash Intro Adding Forum Online forums are web-based message boards where visitors can open new topics, post topic-relevant messages, and discuss a wide range of questions.
  • 121. Populating Site with Content 121  To add a forum to your site: 1 Go to the Pages step. 2 Select Forum in the Special pages box. 3 Click . You can add several forums to your site.  To proceed to setting up your forum: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 Click Forum in the Site map. Figure 71: Forum Editor In this section: Managing Forum Topics .................................................................................... 122 Managing Replies to Topics .............................................................................. 124 Managing Categories of Forum Topics .............................................................. 126 Setting Up Forum Appearance .......................................................................... 128
  • 122. 122 Populating Site with Content Managing Forum Topics After you add a forum to your site, you can try it and post a new topic. The procedures of managing forum topics are described in the current section. Plesk Sitebuilder offers you two default topics, which you can remove (see page 123) at a later stage. Note: To prevent automated computer generated spam messages, anonymous users will be required to enter a confirmation code to be able to post in your forum. Adding Topic to Your Forum  To add a topic: 1 On the Forum page, go to the Content tab. 2 Click Add New Topic. 3 On the Main Properties tab, enter the subject of a topic in the Subject field. 4 Enter the first message in the topic in the Description field. Figure 72: Creating Topic Subject and Text
  • 123. Populating Site with Content 123 All topics you create in the Wizard are authored by Administrator. If you wish to create a topic under a different author's name, go to the site preview by clicking Preview, navigate to the forum page, and create a topic there. Having created a topic on the site, you can edit its main properties (see page 123) in the Wizard. If you are editing your forum on the published site, republish the site (see page 164) so that your changes take effect. 5 If you want to assign the topic to some category, click the Categories tab and select the desired category. Figure 73: Referring a Topic to a Category 6 Click OK. By default, the module contains two default categories. After you add some new categories (see page 126), or edit the existing ones (see page 126), you can refer the topic to a desired category, or to several categories. Editing Topic  To edit a topic: 1 On the Forum page, go to the Content tab. 2 Click the Edit icon against the topic you want to edit. 3 Edit the topic content and properties as desired. 4 Click OK. Removing Topic  To remove a topic: 1 On the Forum page, go to the Content tab. 2 Select the topic you want to remove. 3 Click Remove Selected.
  • 124. 124 Populating Site with Content Managing Replies to Topics After some topics were added to your forum, you and your site visitors can add replies to these topics. You can edit and manage both your own and your site visitors' replies. The procedures of managing replies to topics are described in the current section. Note: To prevent automated computer generated spam messages, anonymous users will be required to enter a confirmation code to be able to post in your forum. Adding Reply  To add a reply: 1 On the Forum page, go to the Content tab. 2 Click the subject of the topic to which you want to post a reply. 3 Click Add New Reply. 4 Enter the reply text. 5 Click OK. To return to the list of topics, click Back to Topics. Figure 74: Adding a Reply to a Forum Topic All replies you create in the Wizard are authored by Administrator. If you wish to add a reply under a different author's name, go to the site preview by clicking Preview at the bottom of the page, navigate to the forum page in your site menu, and add a reply there. Having created a reply on the site, you can edit its main properties (see page 124) in the Wizard. If you are editing a forum on a published site, republish the site (see page 164) so that your changes take effect.
  • 125. Populating Site with Content 125 Editing Reply  To edit a reply: 1 On the Forum page, go to the Content tab. 2 Click the subject of the required topic. 3 Click the Edit icon beside the required comment. 4 Edit the reply text as desired. 5 Click OK. To return to the list of topics, click Back to Topics. Removing Reply  To remove a reply: 1 On the Forum page, go to the Content tab. 2 Click the subject of the required topic. 3 Select a comment and click Remove Selected.
  • 126. 126 Populating Site with Content Managing Categories of Forum Topics You can arrange the topics in categories by subjects they discuss. The procedures of adding and managing categories are described in the current section. Adding Category  To add a category: 1 On the Forum page, click the Categories tab. 2 Click Add New Category. 3 Enter a name of the new category in the Name field. 4 If you want to provide a short description for the category, enter it on the Description tab. 5 Click OK. Figure 75: Creating a Category for Forum Topics Sitebuilder offers two default categories, which you can remove (see page 127) or edit as desired (see page 126). Editing Category  To edit a category: 1 On the Forum page, click the Categories tab. 2 Click the Edit icon beside the category you want to edit. 3 Edit the category parameters as desired.
  • 127. Populating Site with Content 127 4 Click OK. Removing Category  To remove a category: 1 On the Forum page, click the Categories tab. 2 Select the forum category you want to remove. 3 Click Remove Selected.
  • 128. 128 Populating Site with Content Setting Up Forum Appearance  To set up the appearance of your forum: 1 On the Forum page, click the Settings tab. 2 Specify the maximum number of topics to be displayed on one page. 3 Specify the maximum number of replies to be displayed on one page. To preview your forum appearance, click Preview at the bottom of the Plesk Sitebuilder window and go to the forum page of your web site. Figure 76: Setting Up Forum Appearance Adding Guestbook On the guestbook page, your visitors will be able to leave their notes, messages, and comments. The main difference between guestbooks and online forums is that in forums, all messages are grouped in threads, or topics. In guestbooks, all messages are displayed as they have been submitted, in the reverse order (new messages appearing on the top).  To add a guestbook to your site: 1 Go to the Pages step. 2 Select Guestbook in the Special pages box. 3 Click . You can add several guestbooks to your site.  To proceed to setting up your guestbook: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 Click Guestbook in the Site map.
  • 129. Populating Site with Content 129 Figure 77: Adding Guestbook In this section: Managing Guestbook Messages ....................................................................... 130 Setting Up Guestbook Appearance ................................................................... 132
  • 130. 130 Populating Site with Content Managing Guestbook Messages After you add the guestbook to your site, you can try it and post a new message. The procedures of managing guestbook messages are described in the current section. The module contains two default messages, which you can remove (see page 131) or edit as desired (see page 130). Note: To prevent automated computer generated spam messages, anonymous users will be required to enter a confirmation code to be able to post in your guestbook. Adding Message to Your Guestbook  To add a message: 1 On the Guestbook page, go to the Content tab. 2 Click Add New Message. 3 In the Author field, specify the author of the message. 4 If necessary, specify your e-mail address in the E-mail field. 5 If necessary, specify the URL to your web site or other Internet resource of interest in the URL field. 6 Enter the message text in the Message field. 7 Click OK. Figure 78: Adding Message to Your Guestbook
  • 131. Populating Site with Content 131 Editing Message  To edit a message: 1 On the Guestbook page, go to the Content tab. 2 Click the Edit icon against the message you want to edit. 3 Edit the message as desired. 4 Click OK. Removing Message  To remove a message: 1 On the Guestbook page, go to the Content tab. 2 Select the message you want to remove. 3 Click Remove Selected.
  • 132. 132 Populating Site with Content Setting Up Guestbook Appearance  To set up the appearance of your guestbook: 1 On the Guestbook page, go to the Settings tab. 2 In the Message lifetime field, enter the number of days after which the messages will be added to archive. Whether a message is or is not archived is shown in the S column on the Content tab. 3 In the Number of messages per page, specify the number of messages to be displayed on one guestbook page. 4 If you want the message authors' e-mails to be displayed to guestbook visitors, select the Show author's e-mail check box. 5 In the field Text shown before the Guestbook, enter the text to appear at the top of the guestbook page on your site. To preview your guestbook appearance, click Preview at the bottom of the Plesk Sitebuilder window and go to the guestbook page of your web site. Figure 79: Setting Up Guestbook Appearance Providing Registration to Your Site Visitors You can set up voluntary user registration on your web site. This function has nothing to do with restricted access. Logged in users do not have to enter their name, address, and other data each time they fill a form on the site - this data is automatically inserted into the appropriate text fields of the form (for example, when posting to blog or buying in e-shop).
  • 133. Populating Site with Content 133 Note: To prevent automated registration, users will be required to enter a confirmation code to be able to register on your site.  To enable registration on your site: 1 Go to the Pages step. 2 Select Registration in the Special pages box. 3 Click .  To proceed to setting up registration settings: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 Select the Registration page in the Site map. In this section: Configuring General Settings .............................................................................134 Configuring Autoresponder Messages ...............................................................134 Managing Registered Site Visitors .....................................................................135
  • 134. 134 Populating Site with Content Configuring General Settings  To configure general registration settings: 1 On the Registration page, go to the Common Settings tab. 2 To let site visitors register accounts on your site without your participation, select the Enable Registration check box. If you disable this option, only users registered by you will be able to log in using the credentials you provide. You can register accounts for site visitors in your Administrator Panel, after you publish the site (see Managing Registered Site Visitors (on page 135)). 3 To let registered visitors recover their forgotten passwords, select the Enable Forgot your password option check box. Figure 80: Configuring General Registration Settings When a site visitor accesses the registration page, they are offered to register or log in using their existing account. Figure 81: Registration Page Configuring Autoresponder Messages In Plesk Sitebuilder, you can set up two types of autoresponder messages for registered visitors:  A sign-up message sent to newly registered users.
  • 135. Populating Site with Content 135  A password recovery message sent to users after they use the "forgotten password" option on your site.  To configure autoresponders sent to visitors: 1 On the Registration page, click the Notifications Settings tab. 2 Configure the settings common for notifications of all types:  Name - the name of the notification sender  E-mail address - the notification sender's e-mail 3 Select the type of notification to be configured from the Notification type box. 4 Configure the notification subject and message text as desired . You can insert the following macros in the message body:  %userLogin - visitor's login  %userPassword - visitor's password  %userFirstname - visitor's first name  %userLastname - visitor's last name  %siteURL - the URL of your site Figure 82: Configuring Autoresponder Messages Sent to Registered Users Managing Registered Site Visitors With the Registration module, you can create new and manage existing site visitor accounts.  To proceed to managing site visitor accounts: 1 On the Registration page, go to the Site Users tab.
  • 136. 136 Populating Site with Content Adding Site Visitor Account If you want to provide your site visitors with ready accounts, you can register them in your Administrator Panel and then provide the site visitors their credentials for authenticating on the site.  To add a site visitor account: 1 On the Registration page, go to the Site Users tab. 2 Click Add New Account. 3 Specify the contact and login information for the user account. 4 Click OK. Changing Site Visitor Account Information You may need to modify a site visitor's account if, for example, a site visitor forgets his or her password or specifies wrong e-mail.  To modify a site visitor account: 1 On the Registration page, go to the Site Users tab. 2 Click the name of the appropriate site visitor. 3 Make the necessary changes. 4 Click OK.
  • 137. Populating Site with Content 137 Suspending and Unsuspending Site Visitor Account By default, all created site visitor accounts are active. If an account is active, the site visitor can log in on the Registration page with his or her credentials. If, due to some reasons, you want to prohibit a site visitor from authenticating on the site, you can suspend his or her account.  To suspend a site visitor account: 1 On the Registration page, go to the Site Users tab. 2 Select the site visitor account you want to suspend. 3 Click Deactivate. Suspended site user accounts are indicated with the icon.  To unsuspend a site visitor account: 1 On the Registration page, go to the Site Users tab. 2 Select the suspended site visitor account you want to unsuspend. 3 Click Activate. Active site visitor accounts are indicated with the icon. Removing Site Visitor Account  To remove a site visitor account: 1 On the Registration page, go to the Site Users tab. 2 Select the site visitor account you want to delete. 3 Click Delete.
  • 138. 138 Populating Site with Content Incorporating Link to External Page into Your Site Menu Adding links to external pages to your site menu allows you to advertise your partners' or friends' web sites or to redirect visitors to some online services or information sources directly from your site menu.  To incorporate a link to an external page into your site menu: 1 Go to the Pages step. 2 Select External Page in the Special pages box. 3 Click . 4 Go to the Edit step. 5 Select External Page in the Site map. 6 In the URL field, specify the web address of the external page (http://, https:// or ftp://). When a site visitor clicks a menu item linked to an external page, the page opens in the same window. Figure 83: Incorporating Link to External Page into Your Site Menu Adding Maps You can add maps to your site, thus displaying any location that may be of interest to your site visitors. To add geographical maps to your site, you can either use the free-of-charge Google Maps service (see page 139), or purchase an account with the Microsoft MapPoint Web Service (see page 141) from Microsoft, Inc. In this section: Configuring Google Maps API Service .............................................................. 139 Configuring Microsoft MapPoint Web Service.................................................... 141
  • 139. Populating Site with Content 139 Configuring Google Maps API Service The Google Maps API service lets you insert Google maps in your web pages. You can add overlays to the map (including markers and polylines) and display shadowed "info windows". To be able to use the feature on your site, you need to get the Google Maps API key for your site URL. The Google Maps API service supports the following browsers:  Internet Explorer 6.0 and later  Firefox 0.8 and later  Safari 1.2.4 and later  Netscape 7.1 and later  Mozilla 1.4 and later  Opera 8.02 and later  To insert a Google map into a page: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 In the Modules area, click the Area Map module icon and keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the page. To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title in the Modules area. 3 Click Service provider settings on the title bar of the Area Map module. Figure 84: Selecting Google Maps as a Mapping Service Provider 4 Select Google Maps API service. 5 Enter your registration key in the Google Maps API key box and click OK. If you haven't registered this service with Google yet, click the link provided on the dialog window and complete the free sign up procedure as described. When registering a Google Maps API key, be sure to specify the correct site URL. 6 Click Choose location.
  • 140. 140 Populating Site with Content Figure 85: Specifying a Geographical Location to Be Shown on the Map (Google Maps) 7 Type the name of the geographical location you want to show and click Find Location. If for some reason Google doesn't find the required location, or if you want to specify your own location, enter the name of a larger geographical object (the city, country, etc.) in the Find Location box, and then use the arrows and scaling functions to manually navigate to the required geographical point. 8 Click on the required point on the map. On the form that appears, specify the title and address of the location in the Title and Address fields and click Save. You may leave both these fields blank.
  • 141. Populating Site with Content 141 Figure 86: Specifying Geographical Location Properties (Google Maps) 9 Click OK. On the map, a marker appears at the specified point. The title and address of the location is displayed to your site visitors after they click on the marker. For full information on configuring driving directions and other Google Maps features, refer to Google Maps API FAQ (http://code.google.com/support/bin/topic.py?topic=10028). Configuring Microsoft MapPoint Web Service In order to use the Microsoft MapPoint Web Service on your pages, you first need to purchase this service from Microsoft, Inc. You can choose one of licensing options provided by Microsoft, Inc.:  Purchase MapPoint Web Service through a direct agreement with Microsoft. If you choose this method, you purchase one license per each Area Map module added to your sites.  Purchase MapPoint Web Service through Microsoft Volume Licensing. If you choose this method, you purchase one license for all Area Map modules added to all your sites.  To insert a Microsoft MapPoint map into your web page: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 In the Modules area, click the Area Map module icon and keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the page.
  • 142. 142 Populating Site with Content To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title in the Modules area. 3 Click Service provider settings on the title bar of the Area Map Module. 4 Select Microsoft MapPoint Web Service. Figure 87: Selecting Microsoft MapPoint as a Mapping Service Provider 5 Enter your Microsoft MapPoint Service credentials in the User name and Password fields and click Log in to MS Map. If you have not yet purchased a Microsoft MapPoint Service license, click the provided link to go to the Microsoft MapPoint Service page, and follow the provided instructions. Figure 88: Specifying a Geographical Location to Be Shown on the Map (MS MapPoint)
  • 143. Populating Site with Content 143 6 Enter the name of the location you want to show in the Find Locations field. 7 Click Find Locations. 8 From the list of results, select the location to be displayed on your web page. 9 Click OK. Note: If later you change your Microsoft MapPoint Service account settings, click Relog in to MS Map. You will be forwarded to the Area Map configuration window, where you can enter your new credentials. Adding Feedback Form Online feedback forms enable you to gather visitors’ opinion about your site.  To set up a feedback form on your site: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 In the Modules area, click the Feedback module icon and keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the page. To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title in the Modules area. 3 To set up the general properties of your feedback form, click Properties on the module title bar and:  In the Title field, enter a name for the feedback form.  In the Your e-mail field, enter the e-mail address the filled in feedback forms will be sent to.  In the Subject field, enter the subject of the feedback e-mail message. Figure 89: Configuring General Feedback Form Properties 4 Click OK. 5 To arrange the list of fields in your feedback form, click Add/Edit Fields.
  • 144. 144 Populating Site with Content By default, the Feedback module contains a number of fields commonly used in feedback forms. You can adjust the existing fields, as well as add new ones. Figure 90: Managing Feedback Form Fields 6 To add a new field, click Add Field. 7 From the Name box, select a name for the field. 8 From the Type field, select the type of data that can be entered in current field. The supported data types are:  String - allows specifying any arbitrary text string. It may include national characters, punctuation marks, and spaces, but may not include line breaks. The output is displayed in multi-line mode.  Text - same as string, but with line breaks allowed.  Phone - allows entering an international phone number. May contain numbers, spaces, parenthesis, "+" and "-" symbols.  E-mail - allows inputting e-mail addresses only.  Integer - allows entering an integer number (positive, negative, or zero).  Double - allows entering a floating point number, with a point or a comma as a decimal separator. Leading and trailing zeroes are not supported.  Currency - allows entering a floating point number. Leading and trailing zeroes are not supported.  Date - allows entering a date in format mm/dd/yyyy, with a slash ("/") as a separator.  Password - allows entering any arbitrary text string. 9 To make a field required for filling in, select the Required check box beside the corresponding field. 10 Set the order of fields in the feedback form by clicking or beside the respective fields. 11 To remove a field, select it in the list and click Delete.
  • 145. Populating Site with Content 145 12 Click OK. 13 To specify the text to be displayed to the site visitors after they submit the feedback form, click Response on the module title bar and type your text in the provided field. Figure 91: Specifying Text to Be Displayed to Site Visitors after They Submit the Feedback Form 14 Click OK. Online feedback forms enable you to gather visitors’ opinion about your site.  To set up a feedback form on your site: 15 Go to the Edit step. 16 In the Modules area, click the Feedback module icon and keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the page. To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title in the Modules area. 17 To set up the general properties of your feedback form, click Properties on the module title bar and:  In the Title field, enter a name for the feedback form.  In the Your e-mail field, enter the e-mail address the filled in feedback forms will be sent to.  In the Subject field, enter the subject of the feedback e-mail message.
  • 146. 146 Populating Site with Content Figure 92: Configuring General Feedback Form Properties 18 Click OK. 19 To arrange the list of fields in your feedback form, click Add/Edit Fields. By default, the Feedback module contains a number of fields commonly used in feedback forms. You can adjust the existing fields, as well as add new ones. Figure 93: Managing Feedback Form Fields 20 To add a new field, click Add Field. 21 From the Name box, select a name for the field. 22 From the Type field, select the type of data that can be entered in current field. The supported data types are:  String - allows specifying any arbitrary text string. It may include national characters, punctuation marks, and spaces, but may not include line breaks. The output is displayed in multi-line mode.  Text - same as string, but with line breaks allowed.  Phone - allows entering an international phone number. May contain numbers, spaces, parenthesis, "+" and "-" symbols.
  • 147. Populating Site with Content 147  E-mail - allows inputting e-mail addresses only.  Integer - allows entering an integer number (positive, negative, or zero).  Double - allows entering a floating point number, with a point or a comma as a decimal separator. Leading and trailing zeroes are not supported.  Currency - allows entering a floating point number. Leading and trailing zeroes are not supported.  Date - allows entering a date in format mm/dd/yyyy, with a slash ("/") as a separator.  Password - allows entering any arbitrary text string. 23 To make a field required for filling in, select the Required check box beside the corresponding field. 24 Set the order of fields in the feedback form by clicking or beside the respective fields. 25 To remove a field, select it in the list and click Delete. 26 Click OK. 27 To specify the text to be displayed to the site visitors after they submit the feedback form, click Response on the module title bar and type your text in the provided field. Figure 94: Specifying Text to Be Displayed to Site Visitors after They Submit the Feedback Form 28 Click OK.
  • 148. 148 Populating Site with Content Adding RSS News Feeds RSS, which stands for Really Simple Syndication, allows you to automatically load favorite news and information on you site from RSS news feeds (also called "channels"). Many well-known news communities and corporate sites offer news headlines and article summaries in the form of news channels. RSS readers retrieve the recent content from the RSS news feeds and display it on your site. A visitor can preview the recent news content from your site and will be redirected to the news page if they want to read the full story. The news from RSS channels are updated automatically and do not require any interaction from your part.  To add RSS news feeds to your site: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 In the Modules area, click the RSS Reader module icon and keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the page. To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title in the Modules area. 3 Click Properties on the title bar of the RSS Reader module. 4 Select a channel to import the news from. When you roll your mouse over a channel, you can see the channel URL in the field below.
  • 149. Populating Site with Content 149 Figure 95: Adding RSS News Feeds 5 If you select the Custom channel, enter the channel URL in the field below. 6 Click OK.
  • 150. 150 Populating Site with Content Inserting Scripts into Your Web Pages Using the Script module you can insert ready code snippets in your web pages. You can use this module to:  Add functional elements to your site pages, in addition to the existing Plesk Sitebuilder modules. With the help of such elements you can  Insert video and audio files from YouTube and other streaming media providers  Display time and date  Display pop-up messages  Set up automatic forwarding to other web pages  Set up a variety of visual effects: change of background color, text effects on mouse hover, and more  Display system information: the list of available PHP extensions, server settings, and more  Participate in banner networks  Place interactive elements on the page: games (for example, "Miner"), calculator, entertainment tests - and much more  Incorporate web pages created in other programs into your Plesk Sitebuilder web site. Plesk Sitebuilder allows you to add any code written in any scripting or other language into the Script module: HTML, DHTML, XML, PHP, ASP, SSI, Perl/CGI, JavaScript, Java applets, and many more. You can find all kinds of third party scripts on popular webmaster's resources available on the Internet. The scripts will work correctly in case the publishing server is configured accordingly. Study the Readme files for the script you wish to add, and compare the requirements to those of the Plesk Sitebuilder publishing location (see page 169). If there are some additional requirements imposed by your scripts, contact your Plesk Sitebuilder provider for assistance.  To insert a script into you web page: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 In the Modules area, click the Script module icon and keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the page. To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title in the Modules area. 3 Click Properties on the title bar of the Script module. 4 In the Script text box, replace the default text with the code of your script. For example, to insert a video clip from YouTube, copy the piece of HTML markup that accompanies the clip and paste it to the Script module editor.
  • 151. Populating Site with Content 151 5 Click OK. Figure 96: Inserting Scripts into Your Web Pages To incorporate a web page created in some other program into your Plesk Sitebuilder site, copy the source code of the desired page and paste it into the Script module as described above. Note: 1. Scripts cannot be executed on site preview. To check the script operation, publish the site and proceed to the corresponding page. 2. Some scripts may require that you upload some additional content in your site home directory. If you have no access credentials for the publishing location, or do not have enough permissions for uploading content, contact your hosting provider for assistance.
  • 152. 152 Populating Site with Content Conducting Polls and Online Surveys Online polls and surveys enable you to receive valuable feedback from your site visitors. You can collect votes on different questions and display the results as dynamic graphical charts directly on the page. The Plesk Sitebuilder voting module tracks visitor uniqueness based on the single session principle - which means that a visitor cannot vote several times in one poll within the same user session.  To set up voting on your site: 6 Go to the Edit step. 7 In the Modules area, click the Voting module icon and keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the page. To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title in the Modules area. 8 Click Properties on the title bar of the Voting module. 9 To provide the question of your survey, type your question in the text field on the Question tab. Figure 97: Specifying a Question for Your Poll 10 To arrange the list of available answers, go to the Answers tab. The Voting module must contain at least two answers. By default, the module contains two default answers, which you can remove or edit as desired. 11 To edit the text of an existing answer, type the new text in the current answer text field.
  • 153. Populating Site with Content 153 12 To add an answer, click Add New Answer and enter the text into the newly appeared text field. The maximum number of answers is unlimited. Figure 98: Specifying Answers to Your Poll Question 13 To change the order in which the answers are displayed, use the and arrows. 14 To delete an answer, select it and click Remove Selected. 15 Click OK.
  • 154. 154 Populating Site with Content Adding Online Status Indicator Online Status Indicator module allows you to place an icon showing your ICQ or Skype status on your site.  To add an online status indicator to your site: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 In the Modules area, click the Online Status Indicator module icon and keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the page. To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double click the module title in the Modules area. 3 Click Properties on the title bar of the module window. 4 Select your instant messenger provider: ICQ or Skype. 5 If you select ICQ:  Specify your ICQ UIN.  Select the type of icon to be displayed for your ICQ status. The result of your choice is shown in the Preview area.  Click OK. Figure 99: Setting Up Online Status Indicator for Your ICQ Account 6 If you select Skype:  Specify your Skype name.  Select an icon to be displayed for your Skype status. The result of your choice is shown in the Preview area.  If you want site visitors to be able to call you on Skype directly by clicking the status indicator icon, select the Start Skype call upon clicking the icon check box.
  • 155. Populating Site with Content 155  Click OK. Figure 100: Setting Up Online Status Indicator for Your Skype Account Adding SitePal Animated Character With the help of the SitePal module, you can add SitePal speaking animated characters (http://www.sitepal.com) to your site, to enrich site visitor experience and increase sales. You can select the preferred character from the SitePal collection, design the character and scene as desired, and attach an audio file with your commercial to it. You can create SitePal animated scenes in any language, but the editor interface is available in English only. Note: To ensure correct operation of the module, enable pop-ups for the Plesk Sitebuilder server in your web browser settings. For viewing SitePal characters, Adobe Flash Player 9.0.115 or later is required.  To add a SitePal character to your site: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 In the Modules area, click the SitePal module icon and keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the page. To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double the click the module title in the Modules area. 3 To set up a character, click Properties on the module title bar.
  • 156. 156 Populating Site with Content When you open the SitePal editor for the first time in your Sitebuilder Wizard, you see a pop-up window with a welcome message from SitePal. On this dialog, you will also find general information about SitePal characters (on the About Sitepal tab), and a list of available SitePal service packages (on the Packages tab). If you already have a SitePal account, enter your credentials in the fields provided on the welcome screen and log in. Important: By default, you are using the Free package, which allows to create only two scenes, use only two models, does not allow using the text-to-speech feature for creating the scene audio and limits the number of streams (that is, playbacks on the site page) to 150 per month. All sites you create in your Plesk Sitebuilder will use one common SitePal package - therefore please bear in mind that the allowed number of scenes, models and streams per month will be shared between all your sites. If later you wish to upgrade to one of the premium packages, use one of the following methods:  Click the UPGRADE or BUY button above the scene preview window. Such buttons appear each time you try to use a paid model or feature while working with a Free package.  Use the Upgrade Your Account button at the bottom of the page. This button appears after you save your first scene. To proceed, close the window. You can view this information any time later by clicking About. Figure 101: SitePal Editor 4 In the SitePal editor, select the model you like on the Model Gallery tab.
  • 157. Populating Site with Content 157 The default Free SitePal package allows you to use only two models, which you can choose among the free models only. Paid models are marked with the icon. To filter out free models, select the Show only the models I own check box. If you wish to purchase a model (which requires upgrading to one of the premium packages), click UPGRADE or BUY above the scene preview window and follow the purchasing instructions on the SitePal web site. 5 On the Accessories step, adjust the parameters of the model's exterior.  On the Style tab, choose the hair style, clothes, accessories and other attributes for the model by switching between the attribute thumbnails and selecting the preferred design for each attribute in the work area.  On the Color tab, adjust the color of the model's hair, skin, eyes, make-up and mouth.  On the Attributes tab you can adjust additional exterior parameters and age the model if necessary. 6 On the Backgrounds step, choose a background for the scene. If necessary, upload your own background image by clicking Upload on the Background Gallery tab. You can view and manage your custom backgrounds on the My Background tab. 7 On the Audios step, attach the audio file with the character's message.  To produce the audio for the scene using the text-to-speech feature (typed text transformed into an audio file), click the TTS tab. Type or paste the text in the text box and choose the language and speaker's voice for this language from the provided boxes. When you select a language, the list of available voices is narrowed down accordingly. Note: The text-to-speech feature is not allowed in the default Free package. To be able to use the feature, click UPGRADE above the scene preview window and follow the package purchasing instructions on the SitePal web site.  To record a message using a plugged-in microphone, follow the instructions provided on the Mic tab.  To upload the audio file from your computer, follow the instructions provided on the Upload tab.  To have your message recorded by one of professional voices, click the Voice Talent tab, click Pick Your Professional Voice below and follow the purchasing instructions on the SitePal web site.  To record a message on the phone, follow the instructions provided on the Phone tab. You can view, edit or delete the created and uploaded audios on the Saved tab. This tab also contains a number of SitePal commercial audios provided as examples. 8 On the Players tab, select the style of the SitePal scene window. 9 Click Save Scene. 10 Fill in the registration form that opens and click Register.
  • 158. 158 Populating Site with Content After you register with SitePal, the saved scene appears under the Scene List title on the left. Together with it, the default second scene appears, which is proposed as a basis for your new SitePal scene. Your registration details and the Upgrade Your Account button appear at the bottom of the SitePal editor screen. Note: The default Free package allows you to create only two scenes. After you exceed this limit, each new scene, when saved, replaces one of the former ones (the earliest one created). 11 Click Settings in the left part of the screen. 12 In the opened window, configure the basic playback settings for the scene and click Apply. For instructions on configuring these settings, click on icons in each section of the screen. 13 Click Publish. Configure the publishing parameters: the scene dimensions, and the background color against which the progress bar is displayed when the scene is loading. If you wish the scene to be uploaded by the secure HTTPS protocol, select the Secure Protocol (https) option. If you wish the scene to be rendered in browsers with disabled JavaScript (such situations are quite rare, but possible), from the Publish To box, select Web Page (no Javascript). Otherwise, leave the default Standard Web Page option selected. To create a new scene, click the default second scene (the one automatically created by SitePal editor) under the Scene List title and configure it as described the current procedure. If you are using the Free package, after you create and save two scenes, you can only reuse models from these scenes; choosing new models, even among the free ones, becomes unavailable. When reusing a model from one of the previously saved scenes, you have the following options:  To redesign the formerly used model from scratch, select the check box Show only the models I own on the Models step and select the model you like.  To reuse the model together with the previously applied design (clothes, hair style, etc.), go to the Saved Models tab on the Models step and select the model you like.
  • 159. Populating Site with Content 159 Adding Site Map The Site Map module allows you to display a clickable hierarchical model of your site structure to visitors.  To add a site map to your site: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 In the Site map area, select the page where you wish to place the site map. 3 In the Modules area, click the Site Map module icon and keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the icon to the desired location on the page. To insert the module in the beginning of the page, double click the module title in the Modules area. In the module window, you will see the default view of your site map. 4 To configure the site map appearance, click Properties on the title bar of the module window. 5 Select the preferred site map layout: One column or Two columns. 6 Choose Bullet styles for first level and second level pages (separately). The options are:  None (no bullet)  Circle (○ an open circle)  Disc (● a solid circle)  Square ( ■ a solid square) 7 Click OK. Figure 102: Configuring the Site Map Appearance
  • 160. CHAPTER 5 Making Your Site Searchable Searchability is one of the key parts of your site's success. Putting site online is not enough - you should make sure that it can be easily found through search engines like Google. Besides, to get your site indexed and searched effectively, it is important to specify proper keywords and description for the key pages of your site. See the following sections for more details. In this chapter: Specifying Keywords to be Used by Search Engines ........................................ 160 Providing Description to be Displayed in Search Results .................................. 161 Submitting Site to Search Engines .................................................................... 161 Specifying Keywords to be Used by Search Engines Most search engines will use the keywords you choose to properly index your site and determine its relevance to search queries. That is why you should think carefully and pick only those words that best describe the page. Note that it is not necessary to specify keywords for every page, as well as to use too many keywords - three-four words for the most important pages will suffice.  To specify keywords for a page: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 Go to the desired page. 3 In the Site map area, type the desired keywords in the Page keywords field, separating them with a comma.
  • 161. Making Your Site Searchable 161 Providing Description to be Displayed in Search Results Description you specify at this step will be displayed below the page title when the page appears as a result of a user's query on a search engine. Therefore, the description should give the main idea of the page so everyone could instantly understand what the page is about.  To provide a page with description: 1 Go to the Edit step. 2 Go to the desired page. 3 In the Site map area, type the desired text in the Page description field. Submitting Site to Search Engines With Plesk Sitebuilder, you can submit your site to two search engines: MSN and Google.  To submit your site to a search engine: 1 Click Go to Admin Panel. 2 On the left navigation pane, click Sites. 3 Click the name of your site. 4 Click Search Engine Submit. 5 To submit your site to MSN search engine, click Submit your site to MSN search engine. A new window will open providing you with further instructions. 6 To submit your site to Google search engine, click Submit your site to Google search engine. A new window will open saying that the site has been successfully submitted to the Google search engine.
  • 162. CHAPTER 6 Tracking Site Popularity If it is allowed by your service plan, you can enable statistics count on your site and therefore accumulate and analyze the site attendance statistics, which helps to track the popularity of the site. Besides, you can add a counter to your site, so that the total number of site visitors would be displayed for all comers. See the following sections for more details. In this chapter: Enabling Statistics Count on Site....................................................................... 162 Viewing Site Visitors Statistics ........................................................................... 163 Adding Visitors Counter to Site Pages ............................................................... 163 Enabling Statistics Count on Site Note that statistics-related options are available only if the Statistics module is enabled in your service plan.  To enable statistics count on your site: 1 Click Go to Admin Panel. 2 On the left navigation pane, click Sites. 3 Click the name of your site. 4 Click Statistics Settings. Figure 103: Turning On Statistics Count on a Site 5 Select the Statistics is turned on check box. 6 Click OK.
  • 163. Tracking Site Popularity 163 Viewing Site Visitors Statistics  To view statistics about site attendance: 1 Click Go to Admin Panel. 2 On the left navigation pane, click Sites. 3 Click the name of your site. 4 Click Site Statistics. Figure 104: Viewing Site Attendance Statistics Adding Visitors Counter to Site Pages  To add a counter to your site: 1 Go to the Pages step. 2 Select the Add a counter to every page check box. 3 In the Initial value field, enter a number that will be a starting point for the counter. 4 From the Counter style list, select the appearance of the counter. 5 Click Save Changes.
  • 164. CHAPTER 7 Publishing Site Publishing your site as an anonymous user If you do not have a Plesk Sitebuilder account and work with the program in demo mode, the site you create is temporary and cannot be published on the Internet until you register a regular user account in Plesk Sitebuilder and buy hosting from your Plesk Sitebuilder provider. On the Publish step of the Wizard, you will see a summary of your site details which may include the following information:  The life-time of your trial site, i.e. the period during which it will be stored on the Plesk Sitebuilder server.  The site preview link: the link to your temporary site as it is displayed to the visitors. You may send this link to your friends, for example.  The link to your temporary site in editable mode. This link opens your site in the Wizard. You may need this link if you decide to register in Plesk Sitebuilder and upgrade your temporary site to a regular one.  Any supplementary information considered to be important by your Plesk Sitebuilder provider, for example, instructions on how to obtain a regular user account in Plesk Sitebuilder and buy hosting services. If you wish to send this information to your e-mail address, enter the address in the field at the bottom of the page and click Send. To open the trial site in your web browser, click Visit Site. The site is available during its life-time period, which is determined by your Plesk Sitebuilder administrator. Figure 105: Publish Step Look for Anonymous Users
  • 165. Publishing Site 165 Publishing your site as a regular Plesk Sitebuilder user If you are a registered Plesk Sitebuilder user, follow the guidelines below to publish or publish your site.  To publish your site: 1 Go to the Publish step. 2 If your Plesk Sitebuilder administrator has already specified the publishing settings for your site (or you have done it yourself in your Administrator Panel), just click Publish. If publishing settings are not specified, perform steps 3-8. If you see a message telling that the publishing settings are not configured, contact your Plesk Sitebuilder administrator for assistance. If you see an error message after clicking Publish, contact your Plesk Sitebuilder administrator, or follow the link to the publishing details screen (if provided) to know the reason of the failure. 3 In the Edit publishing settings section, select a publishing mode (the list of available publishing modes is configured by your Plesk Sitebuilder provider):  FTP - publishing site to an FTP server.  VPS - publishing site to a Virtuozzo Container.  XCOPY - publishing site using the XCOPY technology. Figure 106: Selecting Publishing Mode Note: 1. VPS publishing mode is used for publishing to servers running Parallels Business Automation, Standard. 2. We recommend using XCOPY technology for publishing on local Plesk Sitebuilder host only, as this method is insecure and requires writing permissions on the specified publishing location.
  • 166. 166 Publishing Site Plesk Sitebuilder administrator can prohibit users from editing publishing settings. In that case publishing settings will be displayed to you in read-only mode. 4 If you select FTP publishing mode:  In the Host field, specify the host to which you want to publish the site.  If the maximum number of hosts allowed by your license is limited, select a host from the list. The list of available hosts is configured by your Plesk Sitebuilder administrator.  If the number of hosts allowed by your plan is Unlimited, you can specify the IP address or DNS name of any FTP server you have at your disposal (make sure that the server meets the requirements (see page 169)).  In the Port field, specify the port for connecting to the FTP server. By default, 21 is set.  In the Login and Password fields, provide your FTP server access credentials.  In the Working directory field, specify the directory on the server where the site content will be stored after publication.  In the Web site URL field, enter the web address where the site will be available after publishing. Note: Make sure that the Web site URL and the Working directory settings point to the same publishing location. For example, to publish site with URL http://test.url.com/myfolder, specify the working directory myfolder. 5 If you select VPS publishing mode:  In the Host field, enter the IP address or domain name of the Parallels Virtuozzo Service Container to be used for publishing.  In the Container ID field, specify an ID number of the target Virtuozzo Container on the physical server.  In the User field, enter the name of the Apache user on the Plesk Sitebuilder machine (apache, www-data, etc.).  In the Group field, specify the name of the Apache group on the Plesk Sitebuilder machine (apache, www-data, etc.).  In the Working directory field, specify the absolute path on the Virtuozzo Container to the folder where the site content will be stored after publication.  In the Web site URL field, enter the web address where the site will be available after publication. Note: Using this mode you can publish sites only to servers running Parallels Business Automation, Standard. 6 If you select XCOPY publishing mode:  In the Working directory field, enter the name of a directory (with full path) where the files of your site will be stored after publication. For example, /var/www/yoursite.  In the Web site URL field, specify the web address where the site will be available after publication.
  • 167. Publishing Site 167 7 Click Publish, or place your mouse cursor in one of the fields and press ENTER. The progress bar appears displaying the status of the publishing process. Figure 107: Publishing Progress Indicator After successful publishing, your site immediately goes live, and its full functionality is available to visitors. You can proceed to your site by clicking Visit Site. Figure 108: Successful Publishing Notification Republishing your site After you apply some changes to your site in Plesk Sitebuilder Wizard, you will need to republish your site.  To republish your site: 1 Go to the Publish step.
  • 168. 168 Publishing Site 2 If you wish to preview the changes as they appear on your site, click the Preview site link. 3 If necessary, revise the settings in the Edit publishing settings section. Important: If a site contains modules, we do not recommend changing the FTP Login for FTP publishing mode. Changing your FTP login will change the home directory of the site, and the modules data, which is stored in the former home directory, may be lost. If you have access to your publishing server, you can move your modules data manually from the former home directory (the path on the server will be [Sitebuilder sites directory/Login1/Working directory]) to the new home directory ([Sitebuilder sites directory/Login2/Working directory]). If you have no access to the publishing server, or insufficient permissions for moving files, leave the FTP Login field as is, or contact your Sitebuilder administrator for assistance. If you see a notification that the publishing settings have been changed, you have an option of returning the settings to their previous state. To do so, click Revert Publishing Settings at the bottom of the section. Figure 109: Reverting Publishing Settings to Their Previous State If you do not wish to display the Edit publishing settings section again, click the icon to close the section. The next time you access the Publish screen for this site, the section is not displayed. 4 To apply changes to the site without republishing the whole site, leave the Republish the entire site content option unselected.
  • 169. Publishing Site 169 Select this option, if you wish to recover your site in case it has been destroyed or damaged at the publishing location. 5 Click Publish, or place your mouse cursor in one of the fields and press ENTER. In this chapter: Requirements to Host ........................................................................................169 Requirements to Host The requirements imposed upon a publishing server depend on the type of sites to be published on this server: static or dynamic. In Plesk Sitebuilder, a static site is a site which contains only static HTML pages created with the help of WYSIWYG editor, and does not contain modules - except for the Script and Flash Intro modules. There are no special requirements to a host used for static sites publishing. A dynamic site is a site with dynamic pages: a site containing at least one module (except for the mentioned Script and Flash Intro). To guarantee correct operation of dynamic sites, make sure that the publishing location meets the following requirements:  PHP version 4.3.9 or later is installed on the publishing server.  PHP supports:  The ionCube PHP Loader 3.1.15 or later  DOM XML with XSLT support or PHP XSLT extension (Sablotron)  Multibyte string functions (mbstring extension)  Zlib compression functions (zlib extension)  Session handling functions support (session extension)  SQLite 2.x with UTF-8 encoding support  GD library 2.0.1 or later  In php.ini the following directives are installed:  default_charset = ”UTF-8” Note: Make sure that all extensions you have installed are listed in the extensions directory and in the php.ini file. If PHP is installed as an Apache module, restart Apache after applying the changes.
  • 170. CHAPTER 8 Appendix. Most Common Google Base Attributes Below you will find a list of some Google Base attributes you might find useful for indexing your online store product options. Item Type Attribute Description Example General g:brand The brand name of the product Dell, Sony Apparel g:department The store department that the product falls men's under g:made_in The location where the product was made Format: ISO 3166 country code. US g:material The material the product is made out of leather g:size The size of an item S, XXL, small, medium g:style The style of the product casual Shoes g:heel_height The height of the heel of the shoe 1.5 inches g:width The width of a shoe wide, narrow, regular Books and g:author The author of the information John Steinbeck music g:genre The genre of the product Rock and Roll g:artist The artist or designer that created the work Michael Jackson Consumer g:functions Functions and features of the product photo capacity products and electronics g:height The height of a product 36 inches g:length The length of a product 36 inches g:width The width of a product 36 inches g:tech_spec_li The URL of technical specifications of the http://www.example.com/ nk product, if available. This should not forward to product1techspec.html another URL; it must point directly to the target page. The domain name may not be an IP address. g:wireless_int Wireless interface that the cell phone uses Bluetooth erface g:battery_life The average life of the battery, if the computer Numbers only. is a laptop, in hours 6 g:capacity For electronic devices, the amount of memory 256 MB included in a product. For appliances, the volume of space within the appliance
  • 171. Appendix. Most Common Google Base Attributes 171 g:operating_sy The operating system a computer is running Linux stem g:optical_drive The type of optical drive included with a DVD-R computer g:processor_s The processor speed for the computer 1.67 GHz peed g:screen_size The diagonal screen size 37 inches g:weight The weight of a product 20 pounds g:focus_type The type of focus a camera has auto, manual, fix g:megapixels The resolution of a digital imaging device 6 MP g:zoom The maximum amount a camera can zoom 10x g:display_type The type of display on the television or monitor LCD g:color_output Information about whether or not the printer is Acceptable values are: a color printer false, or true g:load_type The type of loading for a washer top, front, etc. g:platform The platform the game is on Nintendo Wii Toys g:age_range The suggested age range for the toy 10-14 Vehicles g:condition The condition of the vehicle. new, used, refurbished g:make The vehicle manufacturer. Honda g:mileage The current mileage of the vehicle. 17000 g:model The vehicle model. Camry g:price_type The type of pricing for the vehicle. Acceptable values are: negotiable or starting. g:title The name or title of the vehicle. 2003 Honda Civic LX g:vehicle_type The type of vehicle. car, motorcycle, scooter g:vin Vehicle Identification Number. 1M8GDM9AXKP042788 g:year The model year or year built. 2003 The full list of Google Base attributes sorted by category is available here (http://base.google.com/base/products.html), under the Required Attributes title.